Catálogo Do Disjuntor Aberto 3WL (Texto em Inglês)

15
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and

Protection Devices –
Air Circuit Breakers
15/2 Introduction
3WL Air Circuit Breakers

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/
Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 6300 A (AC)
15/6 General data
15/7 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/11 3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/15 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/23 Options
15/29 Accessories and spare parts
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 4000 A (DC)
15/50 3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/53 Accessories and spare parts
Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
■ Overview
Size I Size II Size III

Air circuit breakers
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC) 3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1000, 2000, 4000
1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000,
5000, 6300
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational V AC ... 690/1000/1150 --
voltage Ue V DC -- ... 1000
Rated ultimate Size I Size II Size III
short-circuit breaking capacity kA 55/66 66/80/100 100/150 (3-pole), 30/25/20
at 500 V AC 130 (4-pole) (at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operating 20000 15000 10000 15000
cycles
Mounting position 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 °
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a
15
Degree of protection
With cover IP55 IP55
Without cover IP41 IP41
(with door sealing frame)
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W D W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
Fixed H mm 434 434 434 434
mounting
H
D mm 291 291 291 291

NSS0_00535 Withdraw- H mm 465.5 465.5 465.5 465.5
able D mm 471 471 471 471
NSE0_01109a
NSE0_01108a
NSE0_01107a
NSE0_01106a
NSE0_01111a
Rating Plug
Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76B

Electronic releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
short-circuit protection
Instantaneous ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓
Communication through -- -- -- ❑ ❑
PROFIBUS DP
Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓
CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓
✓ Standard 3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
-- Not available according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
❑ Optional
1)
ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
15/2 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
Switching capacity
Size I II III
Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13
Switching capacity class N S N S H H C C
N S N S H H C C
3-pole 4-pole
Short-circuit breaking capacity
Rated operational voltage Ue
up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)
15
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 150 105 1544) 1544)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw
of the circuit breakers3)
0.5 s kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc
of the non-automatic air circuit breakers
Up to 500 V AC kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
1) Size II with In max 2500 A.

Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N
N 2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.
(Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)
3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.
S
(Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V) 4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.
Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H

H
(Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C
C
(Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole)
at 500 V)
DC
Non-automatic air circuit breakers with DC switching
capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the selection and
ordering data by orange backgrounds.
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/3

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
SENTRON 3WL:
Superior individual products integrated into uniform power
distribution systems - up to and including industry-specific
industrial and infrastructure solutions
7
2
3 8
5
4
9
1
25
15
21
10
19
22 11
23
12
24 18 13
17
14
NSE0_01887a
20
16
15
$ Guide frame (pages 15/30 to 15/33) 4 Operating cycles counter (page 15/38)
% Main circuit connection front, flange, horizontal, vertical 5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) (page 15/44)
(pages 15/45 and 15/46) 6 Protective device with device holder, electronic release (ETU)
& Position indicator switch (pages 15/26 and 15/38) (page 15/34)
( Grounding contact, leading (page 15/42) 7 Remote reset solenoid (page 15/35)
) Shutter (page 15/41) 8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) (page 15/43)
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module (page 15/44) 9 Four-line display (page 15/34)
+ External CubicleBUS module (page 15/43) : Ground-fault protection module (page 15/34)
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release (page 15/40) ; Rated current module (page 15/34)
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system (page 15/39) < Measuring function module (page 15/34)
. Auxiliary switch block (page 15/40) = Circuit breaker (pages 15/7 to 15/22)
/ Door sealing frame (page 15/41)
0 Interlocking set for base plate (page 15/36)
1 Transparent panel, function insert (page 15/35)
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated (page 15/38)
3 Motorized operating mechanism (page 15/40)
15/4 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)
21
Ethernet
19
20
PROFIBUS
4 5 22 14 15 16 17 18 7
8 6
CubicleBUS
10
11 9
1 1
12
13
NSE0_01105h
2 3
15
1 SENTRON 3VL 12 Electronic ETU release
2 Electronic LCD ETU release 13 Measurement function Plus
3 Electronic ETU release 14 ZSI module
4 COM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSI 15 Digital output module with relay contacts
5 COM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSI 16 Digital output module with relay contacts, configurable
6 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) 17 Analog output module
7 BDA Plus with Ethernet interface 18 Digital input module
8 Browser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook) 19 Switch ES Power on PC
9 SENTRON 3WL 20 PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7
10 COM15 PROFIBUS module1) 21 SIMATIC powercontrol
11 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 22 PAC
1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.

Features
• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP Communication:
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
and SENTRON 3WL (ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)
• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories see pages 15/7 to 15/22.
allows easy retrofitting of all communication components • For accessories see pages 15/43 and 15/44.
• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the • For more information see also the chapter "Power Manage-
possibility of linking up external input and output modules to ment System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation,
monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers,
both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/
Intranet/Internet
• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the
Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation
solutions
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/5

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
■ Benefits • Fast and reliable parameterization

• Timely information and response can prevent plant
Low space requirements stoppages
• Effective diagnostics management
The SENTRON 3WL devices require very little space. Size I de-
vices (up to 1600 A) fit into a 400 mm wide switchgear panel. • Measured values are the basis for efficient load management,
Size III devices (up to 6300 A) are the smallest of their kind and for drawing up power demand profiles and for assigning en-
with their construction width of 704 mm fit into a 800 mm wide ergy to cost centers
switchgear panel. • Preventive maintenance reduces the risk of expansive plant
down-times
Modular design
Components like auxiliary releases, motorized operating ■ Application
mechanisms, electronic releases, current sensors, auxiliary cir- • As incoming-feeder, distribution, tie, and outgoing-feeder cir-
cuit signaling switches, automatic reset devices, interlocks and cuit breakers in electrical installations
engagement operating mechanisms can all be exchanged or
retrofitted at a later stage, thus allowing the circuit breaker to be • For switching and protecting motors, capacitors, generators,
adapted to new, changing requirements. transformers, busbars and cables
The main contact elements can all be replaced in order to in- Due to the reinforced use of electronic I&C systems, the de-
crease the endurance of the circuit breaker. mands made on air circuit breakers in terms of operator control
and monitoring of network processes have increased.
Retrofittable modules for electronic releases The extensive, coordinated SENTRON range of devices covers
Modularity is one of the main features of the new SENTRON 3WL all applications between 16 A and 6300 A with compact and air
circuit breakers. circuit breakers.
Special LCDs, ground-fault modules, rated current modules and The AC devices are available as circuit breakers and non-auto-
communication modules for the electronic releases are available matic air circuit breakers. DC devices are only available as non-
for fast and easy retrofitting and adaptation to changing automatic air circuit breakers.
requirements.
Standards
Communication
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:
15
The use of modern communication-capable circuit breakers

opens up completely new possibilities in terms of start-up, • IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
parameterization, diagnostics, maintenance and operation. This • IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
allows many different ways of reducing costs and improving pro- • Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30.
ductivity in industrial plants, buildings and infrastructure projects Versions with UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.
to be achieved. For further standards, see Appendix.
Conductor cross-sections
Size I II
Type Up to 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20
3WL11 10
Permissible load • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare) A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
At rear horizontal main • Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1) A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
circuit connections • Up to 70 °C (Cu black A 1000 1210 1490 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
painted)1)
Main conductor • Copper bars, Unit(s) 1 × 2× 2× 1× 1× 2× 2× 3×
minimum bare mm2 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10
cross-sections Unit(s) 1 × 2× 2× 1× 1× 2× 2× 3×
• Copper bars,
painted black mm2 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Permissible load • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare) A 2500 3200 3950 4000 5000 5920
• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1) A 2500 3020 3810 4000 5000 5810
• Up to 70 °C (Cu black A 2280 2870 3600 4000 5000 5500
painted)1)
Main conductor • Copper bars, Unit(s) 2 × 3× 4× 4x 6x 6x
minimum bare mm2 100 × 10 100 × 10 120 × 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
cross-sections • Copper bars, Unit(s) 2 × 3× 4× 4× 6× 6×
painted black mm2 100 × 10 100 × 10 100 × 102) 100 × 10 100 × 10 120 × 10
1) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.
2) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit
breakers: 4 × 120 × 10 mm.
15/6 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
■ Selection and ordering data

Size Max. rated circuit breaker Rated current1) Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V, PU PS* PG Weight
N
current In ECO switching capacity N (UNIT, per PU
In max. Order No. Basic price SET, M) approx.
For Order No. supplements, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
Horizontal main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Vertical main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
15
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
Front main circuit connection, single hole
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Front main circuit connection, double hole
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releases
Versions without ground-fault protection
ETU15B: Protection functions LI BB
ETU25B: Protection functions LSI CB
ETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EB
ETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FB
ETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protection
ETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DG
ETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EG
ETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FG
ETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing
Without 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
For footnotes see page 15/10.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/7
© Siemens AG 2009

current In standard switching capacity S S (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
15
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000

I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price
Electronic releases

15/8 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

Size Max. rated circuit breaker Rated current1) Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, PU PS* PG Weight
current In high switching capacity H H (UNIT, per PU
Order No. supplements, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
15
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
price
Electronic releases
ETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BB

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/9
© Siemens AG 2009

current In very high switching capacity C C (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
price
Electronic releases
15
Footnotes for pages 15/7 to 15/10: 3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-
1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan- formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on 4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered
page 15/24. separately, see page 15/34.
2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making 5) ETU45B and ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa- and tripping), see page 15/34.
tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications". 6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

15/10 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

3-pole, withdrawable versions

current In ECO switching capacity N N per PU
(UNIT,
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
Without guide frames
(for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
15
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
With guide frames, connecting flanges
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
price
Electronic releases
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/11
© Siemens AG 2009

S
current In standard switching capacity S (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
15
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
price
Electronic releases

15/12 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

current In high switching capacity H H per PU
(UNIT,
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
15
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers 2) Order No. supplements Additional
price
Electronic releases

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/13
© Siemens AG 2009

C
current In very high switching capacity C (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
price
Electronic releases
15

3)
Footnotes for pages 15/11 to 15/14: Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-
1)
The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan- formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
4)
If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered
page 15/24. separately, see page 15/34.
2) 5)
For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa- and tripping), see page 15/34.
tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications". 6)

15/14 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


current In ECO switching capacity N N per PU
(UNIT,
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
15
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
price
Electronic releases

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/15
© Siemens AG 2009

S
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
15
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000

I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
price
Electronic releases

15/16 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

current In high switching capacity H H per PU
(UNIT,
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
15
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
price
Without electronic release Without
AA
Electronic releases

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/17
© Siemens AG 2009

C
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
price
Electronic releases
15
3)
1)
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The
If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding
page 15/24. the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4)
2)
For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered
capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa- separately, see page 15/34.
5)
tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications". ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
and tripping), see page 15/34.
6)

15/18 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


N
current In ECO switching capacity N (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
15
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
price
Electronic releases

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/19
© Siemens AG 2009

S
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
15
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000

I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
price
Electronic releases

15/20 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

H
current In high switching capacity H (UNIT, per PU
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
15
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
price
Electronic releases

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/21
© Siemens AG 2009

C
see page 15/23
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 115.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000
price
Electronic releases
15

3)
1)
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The
If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding
page 15/24. the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4)
2)
For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered
capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa- separately, see page 15/34.
5)
tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications". ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
and tripping), see page 15/34.
6)

15/22 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

Options

Order No. supplement Additional
price
3WL 1 . . . - . . . . . -7 7 7 7
Operating mechanisms
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1 Without
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical
and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable
for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
110 110 ... 125 2
230 220 3
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical

and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for
uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Motor Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 230 220 4
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 110 110 ... 125 5
-- 24 -- 24 6
To order different voltages for
motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid or
closing solenoid for synchronization purposes:
"1" at the 13th digit of the Order No. and order codes,
see page 15/25.
1st auxiliary release
15
Without 1st auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC
-- 24 B
-- 30 C
-- 48 D
-- 60 E
110 110 ... 125 F
230 220 G
2nd auxiliary release
Without 2nd auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
-- 24 B
-- 30 C
-- 48 D
-- 60 E
110 110 ... 125 F
230 220 G
Undervoltage release, instantaneous ( 80 ms),
short-delay ( 200 ms)
-- 24 J
-- 30 K
-- 48 L
-- 60 U
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 N
380 ... 415 -- P
Undervoltage release, can be delayed between 0.2 s and 3.2 s
-- 48 Q
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 R
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 S
380 ... 415 -- T
Auxiliary switches
1st auxiliary switch block
2 NO + 2 NC 2 Without
1st + 2nd auxiliary switch block
4 NO + 4 NC 4
6 NO + 2 NC 7
5 NO + 3 NC 8
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/23

© Siemens AG 2009

Options
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and Order No. with "–Z" Additional price
indicate the appropriate order code(s). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
and additional order code(s)
@@@+ . . . + . . .
Code for
"Further versions"–Z
Operating manual
Printed version
In scope of supply of circuit breaker) French/Italian A 1 1
In scope of supply of circuit breaker) Spanish/Portuguese A 1 2
Rated voltage 1000 V AC/DC Add. Add.
price price
Only for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
3-pole 4-pole
(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4")
Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1150 V AC order code "A15".
Size II1) Up to 2000 A A 0 5
2500 A A 0 5
3200 A A 0 5
Size III1)2) 4000 A A 0 5
5000 A A 0 5
6300 A A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V AC/DC
Only for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4")
Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1000 V AC order code "A05".
Size II Up to 2000 A A 1 5
2500 A A 1 5
3200 A A 1 5
4000 A A 1 5
15
For size III select a circuit breaker with very high switching capacity C.
Tin-plated version of the customer's connections
on the guide frame3)4)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or
flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size I A 0 8
Size II A 0 8
Size III A 0 8
Special packaging Additional price
Special packaging for extended technical requirements
Cardboard packaging with wax coating (moisture protection), A 6 0
internal bracing, tilt indicators
Rated current modules/rating plugs Additional price
Rated current
In
A
Only one module is possible per For size I, II 250 B 0 2 Without
circuit breaker (not in conjunction 315 B 0 3 Without
with electronic release ETU15B).
As standard the overcurrent 400 B 0 4 Without
releases are equipped with a 500 B 0 5 Without
rated current module which is
equal to the maximum rated cir- 630 B 0 6 Without
cuit breaker current (In max). The 800 B 0 8 Without
rated current of the selected
1000 B 1 0 Without
rated current module must be
smaller than In max. For size I, II, III 1250 B 1 2 Without
1600 B 1 6 Without
For size II, III 2000 B 2 0 Without
2500 B 2 5 Without
3200 B 3 2 Without
4000 B 4 0 Without
For size III 5000 B 5 0 Without
6300 B 6 3 Without
1) 3)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, Front connections are tinned as standard.
specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame. 4)
The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
2)
Not necessary for circuit breakers with very high switching lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
capacity C as these circuit breakers can be used as standard up to
1150 V AC.
15/24 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Options
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
@@@+. . . + . . .
Code for
Indication/operator control elements, door sealing frames
5-digit mechanical operating cycles counter1) C 0 1
Electrical ON button Button with sealing cap C 1 1
in the operator panel2) Key operation with lock CES C 1 2
Possible only for circuit breakers with
closing solenoid.
Storage status 1 NO C 2 0
signal switches 2) (S21)
Ready-to-close signal switch (S20) 1 NO C 2 2
Signal switches2) For the first auxiliary release (S22) C 2 6
For the second auxiliary release (S23) C 2 7
Motor shutdown switch in the operator panel3) S 2 5
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of S 2 4
the mechanical OFF pushbutton
Door sealing frames T 4 0
Reclosing lockouts and remote resets
Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout K 0 1
Tripped signal switch2)4) 1 CO K 0 7
Remote reset solenoid for displays and reset buttons
including automatic reset of the reclosing lockout
15
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 K 1 0
-- 48 K 1 1
120 125 K 1 2
208 ... 250 208 ... 250 K 1 3
Motorized operating mechanisms and
closing/opening solenoids
Motorized operating mechanisms
Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"
Motor
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 ... 30 M 0 1
-- 48 ... 60 M 0 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 0 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 0 6
Closing solenoids suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Activation solenoids
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M2 1
-- 30 M2 2
-- 48 M2 3
-- 60 M2 4
110 110 M2 5
230 220 M2 6
Closing solenoids5) – unsuitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 3 1
-- 48 M 3 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 3 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 3 6
Opening solenoids (shunt releases)6) –
not suitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 4 1
-- 48 M 4 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 4 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 4 6
1) 4)
Only possible with motorized operating mechanism. Not available for non-automatic air circuit breakers.
2) 5)
Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or Overexcited, i.e. opening time 50 ms (standard > 80 ms).
"F12". 6) Only possible if the 14th position of the Order No. for the circuit breaker is
3) Only for circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism, not possible "A", i.e. "without 1st auxiliary release".
with order codes "C11", "C12".
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/25

© Siemens AG 2009

Options
indicate the appropriate order code(s). 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Code for
"Further versions" -Z
Order Order code
code for for with-
fixed- drawable
mounted version
version
Interlocks, covers, position indicator switches @@@ @@@
Mutual mechanical
interlockings Fixed-mounted circuit breaker S 5 5 -- -- --
(interlocking module
with Bowden wire 2 m) For withdrawable circuit breakers R 5 5
with guide frame --
For guide frames -- R 5 6
For withdrawable circuit breakers -- R 5 7
Arc chute covers 3-pole

Not available for Size I -- R 1 0
- 1000 V version (order code "A05") Size II -- R 1 0
- DC version Size III -- R 1 0
- 4000 A size II
4-pole
Size I -- R 1 0
Size II -- R 1 0
Size III -- R 1 0
15
Shutters 3-pole
2-part Size I -- R 2 1
lockable Size II -- R 2 1
with padlocks 1) Size III -- R 2 1
4-pole
Size I -- R 2 1
Size II -- R 2 1
Size III -- R 2 1
Position indicator switches Connected Test Discon-

for guide frames position position nected
position
1 CO 1 CO 1 CO -- R 1 5
3 CO 2 CO 1 CO -- R 1 6
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
@@@ +. . . + . . .
Code for
Communication and measurement functions
Breaker status sensor (BSS) F 0 1
PROFIBUS communications interface2) Including COM15 and breaker F 0 2
status sensor (BSS)
MODBUS communications interface2) Including COM16 and breaker F 1 2
status sensor (BSS)
Measurement function Plus F 0 5
(without PROFIBUS/MODBUS communications interface)3)
Overload and short-circuit protection for neutral conductors
Internal current transformers for Size I F 2 3
N conductors Size II F 2 3
Only possible with 4-pole circuit breakers
with ETU27B to ETU76B Size III F 2 3
EMC filters
EMC filters Common-mode interference F 3 1
suppressor filters (e.g. in IT net-
works, caused by frequency
converters)
Insertion loss (asymmetric) in
the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz
>40 dB.
1) 3)
Padlocks not included in scope of supply. Additional voltage transformers are required for connection of the measure-
2) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec- ment function Plus, see page 15/43.
ify order code "F02" or "F12" for withdrawable circuit breaker only.
15/26 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Options
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. Order No. with "–Z"
and indicate the appropriate order 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
code(s). 3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Code for
Order code Add. price Order code Add. price
for fixed- for fixed- for with- for withdraw-
mounted mounted ver- drawable able version
version sion version
Locking devices @@@ @@@
Locking devices against

unauthorized closing,
in the operator panel
The disconnector unit fulfills the Made by CES S 0 1 S 0 1
requirements for main circuit break- Made by IKON S 0 3 S 0 3
ers acc. to EN 60204-1
Assembly kit FORTRESS or Castell1) S 0 5 S 0 5
Assembly kit for padlocks2) S 0 7 S 0 7
Made by Ronis S 0 8 S 0 8
Made by Profalux S 0 9 S 0 9
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of S 2 4 S 2 4

the mechanical OFF pushbutton
Locking devices against Made by CES -- R 6 1
unauthorized closing, Made by Ronis -- R 6 8
for withdrawable circuit breakers
The disconnector unit fulfills the Made by Profalux -- R 6 0
requirements for main circuit
breakers acc. to EN 60204-1,
15
consisting of a lock in the cabinet
door, active in the connected
position;
the function is retained when the cir-
cuit breaker is replaced
Locking devices S 3 3 S 3 3
for operating mechanism handles
with padlock2)
Locking devices to prevent Made by CES -- S 7 1
movement of the withdrawable Made by Profalux -- S 7 5
circuit breakers
Safety lock for mounting on Made by Ronis -- S 7 6
the circuit breaker
Locking mechanisms
Locking mechanisms to prevent Made by CES -- R 8 1
movement of the withdrawable Made by Profalux -- R 8 5
circuit breaker in disconnected
positions, Made by Ronis -- R 8 6
consisting of Bowden wire and lock
in the cabinet door
Not possible in combination with
order code "R30" or "R50".
Locking mechanisms To prevent opening of the cabinet door in: S 3 0 R 3 0
Not possible in combination with ON position (fixed-mounted version)/
order code "R81", "R85" or "R86". in connected position (withdrawable
version)
To prevent movement -- R 5 0
with the cabinet door open
Connection methods for auxiliary conductors
Connections for screwless N 6 1 P 6 1
terminals (tension spring)
1)
Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.
2)
Padlock not included in the scope of supply.
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/27

© Siemens AG 2009

Options
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and Order No. with "–Z"
indicate the appropriate order code(s). 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@
+. . . + . . .
Code for
For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frames Add. price Add. price
or for guide frames1) 3-pole 4-pole
To select this connection method,
the 12th digit of the Order No. for the
circuit breaker must be a "6"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top and bottom: Size I, up to 1600 A P 0 0
accessible from front, Size II, up to 2000 A P 0 0
single hole Size II, up to 2500 A P 0 0
Size II, up to 3200 A P 0 0
Size III, up to 4000 A P 0 0
Top and bottom: Size I, up to 1600 A P 0 1
accessible from front, Size II, up to 2000 A P 0 1
double hole Size II, up to 2500 A P 0 1
Size II, up to 3200 A P 0 1
Top: Size I, up to 1600 A P 0 7
horizontal, Size II, up to 2000 A P 0 7
double hole Size II, up to 2500 A P 0 7
Bottom: Size II, up to 3200 A P 0 7
accessible from front, Size III, up to 4000 A P 0 7
single hole
15

vertical Size II, up to 2000 A P 1 8
horizontal Size II, up to 3200 A P 1 8
connecting flange Size II, up to 2000 A P 1 9
vertical Size II, up to 3200 A P 2 3
Add. price Add. price
For fixed-mounted circuit breakers 3-pole 4-pole
To select this connection method,
the 12th digit of the Order No. for the
circuit breaker must be a "2"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top: Size I, up to 1600 A N 1 1
horizontal Size II, up to 2000 A N 1 1
Bottom: Size II, up to 2500 A N 1 1
accessible from front, Size II, up to 3200 A N 1 1
single hole Size III, up to 4000 A N 1 1
vertical Size II, up to 2000 A N 2 0
Size III, up to 4000 A N 2 0
vertical Size II, up to 3200 A N 2 4
1)
Only horizontal connection and vertical connection are available for circuit
breakers with very high switching capacity C.
15/28 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Accessories and spare parts
■ Overview
Determination of the number of auxiliary supply connectors required
This selection is only required if the guide frame is ordered under a The required number of auxiliary supply connectors
separate Order No. depends on:
• Operating mechanism type
X6 X5 • Electronic trip unit with/without current transformer
X7
• Type and number of auxiliary releases
NSE0_01104
X8
• Number of auxiliary switches
• COM15/COM16 communication interface
Number of auxil- Terminal

iary supply
connectors
a First auxiliary supply connector X6 always required. 1 X6
b Operating mechanisms
b1 Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical closing 0
b2 Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing 0 X6
b3 Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing +1 X5
c Electronic trip units
c1 Electronic trip units ETU15B, ETU25B, ETU27B 0
c2 Electronic trip units ETU45B, ETU76B (internal CubicleBUS) +1 X8
Connections for external current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor and ground-fault protection
c3 Current transformer installed in the N conductor (required with 3-pole circuit breakers if c2 is not selected) +1 X8
c4 Current transformer in the neutral point of the transformer (required if c2 or c3 is not selected) +1 X8
d Auxiliary releases
d1 With/without 1st auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F1) 0 X6
d2 2nd auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F2, undervoltage trip unit F3, delayable undervoltage trip unit F4) +1 X5
e Auxiliary switch blocks
e1 1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC 0 X6
15
e2 1st and 2nd auxiliary switch block 4 NO + 4 NC or 6 NO + 2 NC or 5 NO + 3 NC (required if b3 or d2 is not selected) +1 X5
f Communication modules
f1 Without communication module COM15/COM16 0
f2 With communication module COM15/COM16 – +1 X7
occupies the entire terminal strip X7, making the following options no longer possible:
• Tripped signal switch S24
• Stored-energy status indication S21
• Electrical ON button S10
• Signaling switch on first and second auxiliary release S22 + S23
g Optional signals/accessories
g1 Tripped signal switch S24 (only possible if f2 is not selected) +1 X7
g2 Stored-energy status indication S21 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 is not selected) +1 X7
g3 Electrical ON button S10 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 or g2 is not selected) +1 X7
g4 Signal switch on first auxiliary release S22 (only possible if f2 is not selected, +1 X7
required if g1, g2 or g3 is not selected)
g5 Signal switch on second auxiliary release S23 (only possible if f2 is not selected, +1 X7
required if g1, g2, g3 or g4 is not selected)
g6 Ready-to-close indicator switch S20 0 X6
g7 Motor shutdown switch S12 (only possible if motorized operating mechanism is selected) 0 X5
g8 Remote reset solenoid F7 (required if c2 is not selected) +1 X8
h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors (max. 4)
For ordering the auxiliary supply connectors see under

"Accessories and Spare Parts, Guide Frames for AC Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers", pages 15/30 to 15/33
and under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Auxiliary Conductor Connections, Auxiliary Supply Connectors", page 15/39.
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/29

© Siemens AG 2009


Guide frames for AC circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
Size Max. rated circuit breaker Switching DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/ PU PS* PG Weight
current capacity non-automatic air circuit breakers (UNIT, per PU
In max. Icu Order No. Basic price SET, M) approx.
(Order No. supplements per PU
required according to
A kA table below) kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
15
III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000

Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
For required number of auxiliary supply connectors,
see table on page 15/29
Type of auxiliary circuit connections
Without 0 Without
With screw connections (SIGUT) 1
With screwless connection method (tension spring) 2
Position indicator switches
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected position 1 CO contact, 1
test position 1 CO contact,
disconnected position 1 CO contact
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts, 2
test position 2 CO contacts,
Shutters
Without A Without
With shutter, Size I B
2-part, Size II
lockable Size III
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. Order No. with "–Z" Additional
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z price
@@@
Rated voltage 1000 V AC
Size II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A05
Size III, not necessary with with very high switching capacity A05
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection
Size I A08
Size II A08
Size III A08
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/24.
1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

15/30 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

A kA table below) kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 52.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 70.000
III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
III 6300 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 74.000
Main circuit connection connecting flanges
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
15
Without 0 Without
Without 0 Without
Shutters
Without A Without
2-part, Size II
lockable Size III
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
@@@
Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Size I A08
Size II A08
Size III A08
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see
the previous page.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/31
© Siemens AG 2009

A kA kg
table below)
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000
III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000
15
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
Without 0 Without
Without 0 Without
Shutters
Without A Without
2-part, Size II
lockable Size III
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
@@@
Size I A08
Size II A08
Size III A08
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page.

15/32 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

A kA kg
table below)
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 62.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 119.000
III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 124.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
15
Without 0 Without
Without 0 Without
Shutters
Without A Without
2-part, Size II
lockable Size III
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
@@@
Size I A08
Size II A08
Size III A08
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see
the previous page.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/33
© Siemens AG 2009

Designation DT Order No. Price PU PS* PG Weight

per PU (UNIT, per PU
SET, approx.
M)
kg
Protective devices with device holder and optional measurement
function1)
Type With protection Measurement function
function
ETU15B LI Without C 3WL9 311-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU25B LSI Without C 3WL9 312-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU27B LSING Without C 3WL9 312-7AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU45B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 314-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
(without With measurement B 3WL9 314-5AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
NSE0_01610b
display) function Plus

ETU76B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 317-6AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
With measurement B 3WL9 317-6AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
3WL9 31.-.AA.0-0AA1 function Plus
Rated current modules/Rating plugs2)
For size Rated current In (A)
= 3 2 0 0 A
I, II 250 B 3WL9 111-0AA51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
n
315 B 3WL9 111-0AA52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 2 b
400 B 3WL9 111-0AA53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
500 B 3WL9 111-0AA54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0
630 B 3WL9 111-0AA55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
800 B 3WL9 111-0AA56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
1000 B 3WL9 111-0AA57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
I, II, III 1250 B 3WL9 111-0AA58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
1600 B 3WL9 111-0AA61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
15
II, III 2000 B 3WL9 111-0AA62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

2500 B 3WL9 111-0AA63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
3200 B 3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
4000 B 3WL9 111-0AA65-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
III 5000 B 3WL9 111-0AA66-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
6300 B 3WL9 111-0AA67-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
Ground-fault modules3)
5 1
G F M A T 4 5 B GFM AT 45B (only for ETU45B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
g T R IP A L A R M A L A R M J g (s ) 1 2 Jg
G A
B
C T R IP
.5
.4
.3
.1
.2
.3
GFM AT 55B–76B (only for ETU76B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
D .2 .4
O F F E .1 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 2 7 a
3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0
Displays
4-line displays for ETU45B B 3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
N S E 0 _ 0 1 6 0 9
3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0
Current transformers for N conductor protection
Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
(not for ETU release 2) Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Only for ETU release 2 Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 0 a Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
3WL9 111-0AA2.-0AA0 External transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
(T5, see Technical Information Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.380
LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.680
Method")
External transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
With copper connection pieces Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.260
(T5, see Technical Information Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.500
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 1 a
LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement
3WL9 111-0AA3.-0AA0 Method")
EMC filters
EMC filters Not for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Common-mode interference sup- Only for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
pressor filters (e.g. in IT networks,
caused by frequency converters)
Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the
range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB
1) 3)
For replacement in existing circuit breakers please specify the circuit For direct measurement of the ground-fault current, e.g. in the neutral point
breaker ID No. when ordering. of the transformer, a 1200 A/1 A current transformer, class 1, is required.
2)
With the rated current module selected, the maximum rated current In max of The internal load of the SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 m. If the ground-fault cur-
the circuit breaker must not be exceeded. The following applies In In max. rent is to be determined using the vectorial sum of the phases, a current
transformer must be installed in the neutral conductor.

15/34 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


per PU (UNI per PU
T, approx.
SET, kg
M)
More accessories for electronic releases
Sealable covers For ETU15B to B 3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
NSE0_00983b
ETU45B
For ETU76 B 3WL9 111-0AT46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
ETU25B Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout B 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
Spare part for option K01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
Remote reset solenoids1) 24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
For mechanical tripped indicator 48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Spare part for option K10 to K13, see 120 V AC/ B 3WL9 111-0AK05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
"-Z" + order code, page 15/25. 125 V DC
208-250 V AC/ B 3WL9 111-0AK06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0 208-250 V DC
F 7 Retrofittable internal CubicleBUS For ETU45B and B 3WL9 111-0AK30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
wiring for connection to terminal X8 ETU76B
(without male connector2))
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the D 3WL9 111-0AK31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8
(without male connector, not for ETU release 2)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 9 a
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the D 3WL9 111-0AK33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8
3WL9 111-0AK0.-0AA0 for ETU release 2 (without male connector)
Locking devices
Protective covers for Without safety lock B 3WL9 111-0BA21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
mechanical ON/OFF Made by CES
15
Consisting of 2 transparent covers each Made by IKON B 3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
4)
for sealing or for attaching padlocks , B 3WL9 111-0BA24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
cover with 6.35 mm hole (for tool actua-
tion), lock mount for safety lock for key
operation
NSE00980
Locking devices against Assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
unauthorized closing, FORTRESS or
in the operator panel CASTELL3)
3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0 The disconnector unit fulfills the ■ Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111-0BA33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
requirements for main circuit breakers Made by KIRK- B 3WL9 111-0BA34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.270
according to EN 60204-1 Key 1 1 unit 103 0.250
Spare part for option S01 to S09, see Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111-0BA35-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
"-Z" + order code, page 15/27. Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA36-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Made by IKON B 3WL9 111-0BA38-0AA0
Assembly kit for 1 1 unit 103 0.360
padlocks4) B 3WL9 111-0BA41-0AA0
NSE00981
Locking devices against Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
unauthorized closing, Made by IKON B 3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
for withdrawable circuit breakers ■ Made by KIRK- B 3WL9 111-0BA57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0 The disconnector unit fulfills the require- Key 1 1 unit 103 0.300
ments for main circuit breakers accord- Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111-0BA58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.227
ing to EN 60204-1, consisting of lock in Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111-0BA50-0AA0
the cabinet door, active in connected
position; function is retained when circuit
breaker is replaced
NSE00982 Spare part for option R60, R61, R68, see
3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0 "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Locking devices for operating mecha- B 3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
nism handle with padlock4)
Spare part for option S33, see
"-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Locking devices against movement of Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA73-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
the withdrawable circuit breakers Made by IKON B 3WL9 111-0BA75-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Safety lock for mounting on the circuit Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
breaker. Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111-0BA77-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
Spare part for opt. S71, S75, S76, ■ Made by KIRK- B 3WL9 111-0BA80-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27. Key
NSE00984 Interlocking systems Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0 2 of the same keys for 3 switches,
Locking device OFF position,
Key-operated switch on operator panel.
A maximum of 2 switches can be
switched on.
NSE00986
3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0
1) 3)
Can only be used in conjunction with "automatic reset of reclosing lockout", Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.
4)
e.g. "–Z" + "K01", 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0. Padlock not included in the scope of supply.
2)
Required if communication is retrofitted. ■ Start of delivery on request.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/35
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, approx.
M) kg
Locking mechanisms
To prevent movement of the Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA81-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.800
withdrawable circuit breakers Made by IKON B 3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.800
in disconnected position, Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111-0BA85-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.800
consisting of Bowden wire and Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111-0BA86-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.800
NSE00987 lock in the cabinet door
3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0 Spare part for option R81, R85,
R86, see "-Z" + order code,
page 15/27.
"Locking mechanism to prevent
opening of the cabinet door"
(order code "R30") or "Locking
mechanism to prevent move-
3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0 ment with the cabinet door open"
Interlocking (order code "R50").
To prevent opening of the Fixed mounting B 3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600
cabinet door in ON position
(can be defeated)
Spare part for option S30, see
To prevent opening of the Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
cabinet door
(can be defeated)
Spare part for option R30, see
15

movement of the withdrawable
circuit breakers in disconnected
position" (order codes "R81",
"R85" or "R86").
To prevent movement with the Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
cabinet door open
movement of the withdrawable
circuit breakers in disconnected
position" (order codes "R81",
"R85" or "R86").
Interlocks
Mutual mechanical Fixed-mounted circuit B 3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.700
interlocking, breaker
with 2000 mm Bowden wire Spare part for option
(one required for each circuit S55, see "-Z" + order
breaker) code, page 15/26.
NSE00989
Module for withdrawable B 3WL9 111-0BB24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.130

3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0 circuit breaker with frame
Spare part for option
R55, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/26.
When ordered separately
Module for guide frame B 3WL9 111-0BB22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
code, page 15/26.
Module for withdrawable B 3WL9 111-0BB23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
circuit breaker
code, page 15/26.
Adapter for size III B 3WL9 111-0BB30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Withdrawable circuit
breaker
Couplings on the circuit B 3WL9 112-8AH47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.160
breaker (with ring) for
mutual interlocking
Can be used in all circuit
breakers
NSE0_01886 Bowden wires 2000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
3000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.220
3WL9 112-8HA47-0AA0 4500 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360

15/36 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, approx.
M) kg
Test devices
Manual testers release 2 for electronic releases ETU15B B 3WL9 111-0AT32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
to ETU76B
For testing the electronic release functions
Function testers C 3WL9 111-0AT44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.210
For testing the tripping characteristics for
electronic release ETU15B
to ETU76B
Capacitor storage devices
Capacitor storage devices Rated control supply
For shunt release voltage/rated opera-
Storage time 5 min tional voltage
Rated control supply voltage AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
must match the rated control 220 ... 240 220 ... B 3WL9 111-0BA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.520
supply voltage of the shunt 250
release
Suitable also for
3VL and 3WN circuit breakers
15

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/37
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Indicators, control elements
Ready-to-close signal- B 3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
ing switches
1 NO contact
Spare part for option C22,
see "-Z" + order code,
page 15/25.
Signaling switches1)2) 1st or 2nd auxiliary B 3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Spare part for option C26 releases
and C27, see "-Z" + order
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 3 a
code, page 15/25.
3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0 Tripped signaling B 3WL9 111-0AH14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
switches1)2)
1 CO
Spare part for option K07,
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 4 b
page 15/25.
Operating cycles B 3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
counters, mechanical3)
3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0 page 15/25.
Stored energy status B 3WL9 111-0AH08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
signaling switches1)2)
1 NO contact
15

page 15/25.
Position signaling 1st block (3 CO B 3WL9 111-0AH11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 5 a
switches for guide contacts)
3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0 frames 2nd block (6 CO B 3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
Spare part for option R15 contacts)
and R16, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/26.
Electrical ON buttons1)4)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 9 6 a
With sealing cap B 3WL9 111-0AJ02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
(button+wiring)2), With CES assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0 for operator panel.
Possible only for circuit With BKS assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
breakers with closing With IKON assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
solenoid.
Spare part for option C11
and C12, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/25.
N S E 0 0 0 9 9 7 a
Motor shutdown B 3WL9 111-0AJ06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
3WL9 111-0AJ0.-0AA0 switches 5) (mounting on
operator panel)
Spare part for option S25,
page 15/25.
NSE00985 EMERGENCY-STOP B 3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0 pushbuttons
Mushroom pushbutton
instead of the mechanical
OFF pushbutton
Spare part for option S24,
page 15/25.
1) Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or 3) Only in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.
"F12". 4) Not possible with motor shutdown switch.
2) X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames. 5) Not possible with electrical ON button.
If this is not already available, please order additionally
(see pages 15/29 and 15/39).

15/38 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Auxiliary conductor connections
Male connectors for circuit breakers $ B 3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
NSE00978
Extension for the 1000 V B 3WL9 111-0AB02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

male connector versions
(male connector must be ordered separately)
3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0
Male connectors and extension for 1000 V B 3WL9 111-0AB10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 8
Auxiliary supply connec- Screw connection B 3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
tors for circuit breakers or (SIGUT)
guide frames% Screwless connection B 3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0 method (tension
spring)
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 9
3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0
Coding kits for fixed-mounted version B 3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
15
(X5 to X8) &
NSE00974
3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0
Sliding contact modules for guide frames ( B 3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
7 a
9 7
0 0
E 0 _
N S
3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0
One-part sliding contact modules for guide B 3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
NSE0_01586
frames
Screw connection (SIGUT))
3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0
Blanking blocks for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111-0AB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
For a complete auxiliary current connection you must order:

Fixed-mounted version: $+%+&
Withdrawable version: $+(+%
or
$+)
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/39
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Auxiliary releases
Closing solenoids/shunt releases
24 V DC 100 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0 110 ... 125 V DC/110 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 V DC/230 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
24 V DC 5 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
NSE01001
Undervoltage releases
Instantaneous
3WL9 111-0AE0.-0AA0
24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
NSE01002 220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
15
3WL9 111-0AE1.-0AA0
Delayed
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating
mechanisms1)
24 ... 30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
I 48 ... 60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 0 3 a
3WL9 111-0AF0.-0AA0
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary switch blocks 2 NO + 2 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.180
2 NO B 3WL9 111-0AG02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
1 NO + 1 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0
1)
X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames.
If this is not already available, please order additionally
(see pages 15/29 and 15/39).

15/40 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Door sealing frames, covers, shutters
Door sealing frames B 3WL9 111-0AP01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
Spare part for option T40, see
Protective covers, IP55 B 3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
cannot be used in conjunction with
door sealing frames, cover remov-
able and can be opened on both
sides
NSE0_01028a
Shutters
3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.860
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.070
3WL9 111-0AP0.-0AA0
Arc chutes
Arc chutes
15
690 V Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.110
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.680
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.980
1000 V/1150 V Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.140

NSE01007

3WL9 111-0AS0.-0AA0 Arc chute covers1)
Assembly kit for guide frame
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
NSE01008
3WL9 111-0AS3.-0AA0
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.340
Withdrawable part coding
Withdrawable part coding B 3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
By customer, for 36 coding variants
NSE01009
3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0
1)
Not available for 1000 V version, 1150 V version, DC version and size II
with rated circuit breaker current of 4000 A.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/41
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Ground-fault protection
Ground-fault protection between
the guide frame and the Size I, II B 3WL9 111-0BA01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.330
withdrawable circuit breakers
For 30 kA ground short-circuit Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
NSE0 01018a current1)
3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0 Contacting module for guide frame
Contacting modules for
withdrawable circuit breakers
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.250
NSE01019 Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.530
3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0 Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.270
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.500

Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.950
Support brackets
Support brackets B 3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.000
For mounting fixed-mounted circuit breakers
on vertical plane, only for sizes I and II
(1 set = 2 units)
NSE-01022
15
3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0
1)
For 60 kA ground short-circuit current, order 2.

15/42 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, approx.
M) kg
CubicleBUS modules1)
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch, B 3WL9 111-0AT26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
relay outputs
Digital output modules, configurable, relay outputs B 3WL9 111-0AT20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.310
Digital input modules B 3WL9 111-0AT27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Analog output modules B 3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Zone Selective Interlocking modules B 3WL9 111-0AT21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 2 3 a
3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0
Parameterization systems
Breaker Data Parameterization, operation, monitoring and B 3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.900
Adapters diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers
(BDA)3) using the local interface; Breaker Data
Adapter, connection cable to the SENTRON
3WL circuit breaker and to the programming
device (e.g. notebook); can be run with
Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM 1.4.0-01 and
higher
BDA Plus3) Same as BDA, but with additional Ethernet B 3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200
interface for connection to Ethernet/Intra-
net/Internet
Connection Connection cable for connection of BDA Plus B 3WL9 111-0BC21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 2 4 a
cables for BDA to terminal X8 of the SENTRON 3WL circuit
Plus breaker. Required if neither COM15 nor
15
3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0 COM16 nor other external
CubicleBUS modules are available,
length 2 m.
Switch ES Calibration, operation, monitoring, and diag- A 3ZS2 311-0CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 133 0.200
Power nostics of SENTRON circuit breakers via
parameteriza- PROFIBUS DP; runs under Windows 95,
tion Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and
software Windows XP Professional, requires additional
PROFIBUS card e.g. CP5613
Accessories for communications
Preassembled 0.2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL B 3WL9 111-0BC04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
cables for with COM15/COM16
CubicleBUS 1 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL B 3WL9 111-0BC02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
modules with COM15/COM16
2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL B 3WL9 111-0BC03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
with COM15/COM16
2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL B 3WL9 111-0BC05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
without COM15/COM16
SENTRON Detailed description of the communication
manuals for functions for SENTRON circuit breakers incl.
communication installation, connection, commissioning, data
solutions2) transmission to PLC as well as description of
Switch ES Power and BDA.
English Token fee on request A5E0151353-01
German Token fee on request A5E0151347-01
To be ordered from:
http://www.click4business-supplies.de
Free download from:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
Voltage 380 ... 690 V/100 V, class 0.5 B 3WL9 111-0BB68-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600
transformers,
3-pole, for
SENTRON 3WL
with measure-
ment function
Plus
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
1) Each CubicleBUS module is supplied with a 0,2 m factory-fitted cable to
connect the modules with each other. A longer factory-fitted cable is
required for connection to the circuit breaker.
2) Manual for MODBUS communication solution available on request.
3) A 24 V DC power supply unit is required.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/43
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, approx.
M) kg
Retrofitting and spare parts for communication
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PROFIBUS Retrofit kit for PROFIBUS communications B 3WL9 111-0AT12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
retrofit kits including COM15, BSS and set of cables for
Device
all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with
PROFIBUS DP
CubicleBus ETU45B and ETU76B releases
COM15 B 3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
PROFIBUS
modules
NSE-01025
MODBUS Retrofit kit for MODBUS communications B 3WL9 111-0AT14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0 retrofit kits including COM16, BSS and set of cables for
all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with
ETU45B and ETU76B releases
S45
S43 COM16 B 3WL9 111-0AT17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
MODBUS
modules
S42
Breaker B 3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
status sensor
S40
(BSS)
S44 Measurement For all ETUs except ETU release 2 B 3WL9 111-0AT03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
NSE01026
function Plus1) (voltage transformer required)
S41
Measurement For ETU release 2 B 3WL9 111-0AT04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
1)
3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0 function Plus (voltage transformer required)
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
1)
If retrofitted, a measuring accuracy of 3 % is achieved.
15

15/44 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Main conductor connections,
fixed mounting (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0
Front-accessible
main circuit Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
connections, Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
single hole at top
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000
NSE-01010 Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.100
3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0 Front-accessible Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
main circuit Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
connections, Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
single hole at Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100
bottom Size II, up to 3200 A 3WL9 111-0AL55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000
B
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200
Front-accessible Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.400
3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0 connections, Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.400
acc. to DIN 43673, Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.500
double hole at top Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.400
Front-accessible Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
15
connections, Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000
NSE-01011 acc. to DIN43673, Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700
double hole at Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600
3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0 bottom
Rear vertical Size I1), up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
main circuit Size II2), up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
connections
Size III, up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.000
NSE-01012
3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0
1)
In the case of vertical connection size I, up to 1000 A
one 3WL9 111–0AM01-0AA0 vertical connection is required,
up to 1600 A two 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 vertical connections
are required.
2)
In the case of vertical connection size II, up to 2500 A
one 3WL9 111–0AM02-0AA0 vertical connection is required,
up to 3200 A two 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 vertical connections
are required.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/45
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Main conductor connections,
withdrawable versions (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
Front-accessible
main circuit Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
connections, Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
single hole at top
or at bottom1) Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
NSE-01013
Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100
3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200
Front-accessible Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
main circuit Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.700
connections, Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000
acc. to DIN 43673, Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700
double hole at top Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600
or at bottom1)
NSE-01014
3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0
Supports
for front and DIN
connecting bars
3-pole for 3 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.350
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.420
15
4-pole for 4 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.200
Rear vertical Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.660
main circuit Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.870
connections Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.150
NSE-01017 Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.490
3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0
(3 busbar connection
pieces for 3-pole circuit
NSE-01015
breakers)
3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0
breakers)
breakers)
Rear Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630
horizontal Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770
circuit connections
Connecting flanges Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.610
Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN25-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.640
NSE-01016

3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0
1)
When using front-accessible main circuit connections
(withdrawable circuit breakers) supports are required.

15/46 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


SET, M) approx.
kg
Conversion sets
For converting fixed-mounted circuit breakers into withdrawable circuit breakers
Guide frames and sliding contact modules must be ordered separately.
Number of poles Size
3-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.100
II B 3WL9 111-0BC12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.900
III B 3WL9 111-0BC13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.100
4-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400
II B 3WL9 111-0BC15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.450
III B 3WL9 111-0BC16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 10.700
Main contact elements
You must specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering!
Specified for each connection (depending on the number of poles on the circuit breaker,
order 3 or 4 units)
Sizes In max Order No. is automatically adapted
to the circuit breaker ID number
I Up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM90 1 1 unit 103 On req.

L1Y1)
II Up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AM91 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y1)
II Up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AM92 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y1)
15
III Up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM93 1 1 unit 103 On req.
NSE-01021
L1Y1)
1)
Please specify the circuit breaker ID No. in plain text when ordering.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/47
© Siemens AG 2009

Schematics in as-supplied state Version Size DT Order No. Price PU PS* PG Weight
SET, M) approx.
kg
Withdrawable short-circuits, grounding and bridging units
Top and 3-pole
NSE0_01118
bottom Up to I C 3WL9 111-0BD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 30.000
parts of 1600 A
system
L1 L2 L3 are Up to II C 3WL9 111-0BD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 40.500
short- 3200 A
NSE0_01113
circuited Up to III C 3WL9 111-0BD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 65.000
and 6300 A
grounded
NSE0_01119
(as-supplied state)
4-pole
Up to I C 3WL9 111-0BD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 35.000
N L1 L2 L3
1600 A
Up to II C 3WL9 111-0BD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 46.000
3200 A
Up to III C 3WL9 111-0BD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 70.000
6300 A
Conversion for the following applications is possible

NSE0_01118
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
NSE0_01116
15
NSE0_01113 NSE0_01112
NSE0_01119
N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
NSE0_01117
Top and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded Top part of system is short-circuited and grounded,
(as-supplied state) infeed from bottom
NSE0_01120
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 2 2 a
L1 L2 L3
NSE0_01115 NSE0_01114
NSE0_01121
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 2 3 a
N L1 L2 L3
Withdrawable bridging unit, infeed and outgoing terminals are permanently Bottom part of system is short-circuited and grounded,
connected to each other infeed from top

15/48 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009

■ Options
Structure of the Order No.
3WL1 Ô Ô Ò – Ö é â Õ Ó – Ó á Ü Ô An important prerequisite for computer-
based order processing is that order
Example numbers must be structured according
5th position: Size Size II Ô to standardized criteria.
They are used as an unambiguous
6th and 7th Max. rated In max = 2000 A ÔÒ means of communication for various
positions: circuit breaker purposes:
current In max • Offer processing
Selection and configuration
8th position: Switching capacity High breaking capacity Ö • Order processing
class "H": 100 kA Ordering
Order confirmation
9th position: Electronic releases ETU76B with pixel graphics é Handling warehouse products
display Order processing at the
supply bases
Delivery and shipment
10th position: Electronic release ... with ground-fault protection â
• Reporting and
supplement
planning
• Service and warranty
11th position: Number of poles 3-pole Õ The standardized structure ensures that
only one Order No. has to be adminis-
12th position: Installation type Fixed mounting, main circuit Ó tered for one device.
connections on rear, vertical
This saves time and effort during
planning, configuring, ordering
13th position: Operating Manual operating mechanism Ó and stock keeping, and consequently
mechanisms with mechanical closing above all it saves costs.
The example opposite explains the
14th position: 1st auxiliary release Shunt release á various positions within an
AC 50/60 Hz 110 V Order No.
15
15th position: 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release Ü
16th position: Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC Ô
Accessories: with first order (components are already mounted)

Example 3WL1 Ô Ó Ø – Ö å â Õ Ó – Ó á Ü Õ – õ áÒÔ Additional accessory components can
be ordered ready-mounted.
These supplements are identified
"–Z" with order code Communications interface õ áÒÔ by "-Z".
"Standard" + Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
+ communication module COM15 for Even with additional components,
connection to PROFIBUS DP one Order No. is sufficient.
Accessories: for retrofitting (components for subsequent fitting)

Example Additional accessories which are not
intended to be ready-mounted in the
3WL9 Ó Ó Ó – Ò Á Ü Ô Ó – Ò Ü Ü Ò factory, such as spare parts for storage,
Protective cover for mechanical ON/OFF can also be ordered separately from
without lock the circuit breaker.
Accessories for retrofitting are identified
by the Order No. stem 3WL9.
Documentation
Operating manual German/English Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AN1 Delivery time class C
Complete set French/Italian Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AJ1 On request
Spanish/Portuguese Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AL1 On request
Manual German Order No. A5E0151347-01
Communication English Order No. A5E0151353-01
Free download of documentation from

http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
■ More information
Up-to-date information on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/sentron
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/49

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

For general data see page 15/6.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker DT 3-pole non-automatic PU PS* PG Weight
current air circuit breakers DC (UNIT, per PU
In max. SET, M) approx.
Order No. Price
A For Order No. supplements, per PU kg
see page 15/23
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
15

Order No. Price
A For Order No. supplements, per PU kg
see page 15/23
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
2)
Non-automatic air circuit breakers Order No. supplements Add. price
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . . . – . . . . –Z price
@@@
3-pole 4-pole
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II Up to 2000 A A05
Size II Up to 4000 A A05
Note: An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-

For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt- able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-
age: Order with "-Z" and order code "A05". matic air circuit breakers.
Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").
and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "
Options", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.
2)
For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical
Information LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".

15/50 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


Order No. Price
see page 15/23
A kg
(for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
With guide frames,
horizontal main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
With guide frames,
vertical main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
15
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 3 . – . . . . –Z price
@@@
3-pole
Size II4) Up to 2000 A A05
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection.
The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A08
Note:
For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt- An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-
age; order with "-Z" and order code A05. able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-
matic air circuit breakers.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und
and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break- Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op- Partners").
tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
2)
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-
mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3)
4)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately,
specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/51
© Siemens AG 2009


Order No. Price
see page 15/23
A kg
(for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
With guide frames,
horizontal main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
With guide frames,
vertical main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
15
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 4 . – . . . . –Z price
@@@
4-pole
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection.
The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A08
Note:
For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt- An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-
age; order with "-Z" and order code A05. able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-
matic air circuit breakers.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und
and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break- Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op- Partners").
tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
2)
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-
mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3)
4)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-
ify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.

15/52 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009


Guide frames for DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current DT For 3-pole non-automatic PU PS* PG Weight
In max air circuit breakers (UNIT, per PU
Order No. Price SET, M) approx.
A table below) kg
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
Order No. supplements Add. price

Number of auxiliary supply connectors 3-pole
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
15
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
Without 0 Without
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected 1 CO contact, 1
test 1 CO contact,
disconnected 1 CO contact
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts, 2
test 2 CO contacts,
Shutters
Without A Without
With shutter, 2 parts, lockable B
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. Order No. with "–Z" Add.
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z price
@@@
Size II A05
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide
frame1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or
flange connection
Size II A08
Guide frames for 4-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-
Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/53
© Siemens AG 2009

Accessories and Spare Parts
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current DT For 4-pole non-automatic PU PS* PG Weight
In max air circuit breakers (UNIT, per PU
Order No. Price SET, M) approx.
A table below) kg
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
Order No. supplements Add. price
Number of auxiliary supply connectors 4-pole
Without 0 Without
1 connector 1
2 connectors 2
3 connectors 3
4 connectors 4
15
Without 0 Without
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected 1 CO contact, 1
test 1 CO contact,
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts, 2
test 2 CO contacts,
Shutters
Without A Without
With shutter, 2 parts, lockable B
1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. Order No. with "–Z" Add.
and indicate the appropriate order code(s). and additional order code 3WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z price
@@@
Size II A05
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide
frame1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or
flange connection
Size II A08
For guide frames for 3-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers see previous page
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-
Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.

15/54 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and

Protection Devices –
Air Circuit Breakers
15/2 Introduction

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/
Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/6 - Design
15/12 - Function
15/19 - Configuration
15/24 - Technical specifications
Project planning aids
15/32 - Characteristic curves
15/34 - Dimensional drawings
15/47 - Schematics
15/49 - More information
3WL Non-Automatic Air
Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
General data
15/50 - Technical specifications
15/51 - Characteristic curves
15/51 - Dimensional drawings
15
15/55 - Schematics
15/56 - More information
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
■ Overview
Size I Size II Size III

Air circuit breakers
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers 3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers
up to 6300 A (AC) up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1000, 2000, 4000
1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000,
5000, 6300
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational V AC Up to 690/1000/1150 --
voltage Ue V DC -- Up to 1000
Rated ultimate Size I Size II Size III
short-circuit breaking kA 55/66 66/80/100 100/150 (3-pole), 30/25/20
capacity at 500 V AC 130 (4-pole) (at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operat- 20000 15000 10000 15000
ing cycles
Mounting position 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 °
15
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a
Degree of protection
With cover IP55 IP55
Without cover IP41 IP41
(with door sealing frame)
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W D W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
Fixed H mm 434 434 434 434
mounting
H
D mm 291 291 291 291

NSS0_00535 Withdrawable H mm 465.5 465.5 465.5 465.5
D mm 471 471 471 471
NSE0_01109a
NSE0_01108a
NSE0_01107a
NSE0_01106a
NSE0_01111a
Rating Plug
Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76B

Solid-state releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Instantaneous ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓
Communication through -- -- -- ❑ ❑
PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS
Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓
CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓
✓ Standard 3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
-- Not available according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
❑ Optional
1) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
15/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
Switching capacity
Size I II III
N S N S H H C C
3-pole 4-pole
up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
15
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 1544) 1544)
0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65
Up to kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
500 V AC
Up to kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
690 V AC
1) Size II with In max 2500 A.

Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N
N 2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.
3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.
S
(Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V) 4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.

H
C
at 500 V)
DC Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical

specifications by orange backgrounds.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/3

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
SENTRON 3WL:
Superior individual products integrated into uniform power
distribution systems – up to and including industry-specific
industrial and infrastructure solutions
7
2
3 8
5
4
9
1
25
15
21
10
19
22 11
23
12
24 18 13
17
14
NSE0_01887a
20
16
15
$ Guide frame 4 Operating cycles counter

% Main circuit connection, front, flange, horizontal, vertical 5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
& Position indicator switch 6 Protective devices with device holder, solid-state releases (ETU)
( Grounding contact, leading 7 Remote reset solenoid
) Shutter 8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module 9 Four-line display
+ External CubicleBUS modules : Ground-fault protection module
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release ; Rated current module
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system < Measuring function module
. Auxiliary switch block = Circuit breaker
/ Door sealing frame
0 Interlocking set for base plate
1 Transparent panel, function insert
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated
3 Motorized operating mechanism
15/4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)
21
Ethernet
19
20
PROFIBUS
4 5 22 14 15 16 17 18 7
8 6
CubicleBUS
10
11 9
1 1
12
13
NSE0_01105h
2 3
15
1 SENTRON 3VL 12 Electronic ETU release
2 Electronic LCD ETU release 13 Measurement function Plus
3 Electronic ETU release 14 ZSI module
4 COM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSI 15 Digital output module with relay contacts
5 COM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSI 16 Digital output module with relay contacts, configurable
6 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) 17 Analog output module
7 BDA Plus with Ethernet interface 18 Digital input module
8 Browser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook) 19 Switch ES Power on PC
9 SENTRON 3WL 20 PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7
10 COM15 PROFIBUS module1) 21 SIMATIC powercontrol
11 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 22 PAC

Features
• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP Communication:
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
and SENTRON 3WL (ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)
• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories see Catalog LV 1.
allows easy retrofitting of all communication components • For accessories see Catalog LV 1.
• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the • For more information see also the Chapter "Power
possibility of linking up external input and output modules to Management System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation,
monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers,
both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/
Intranet/Internet
• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the
Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation
solutions
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/5

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
■ Design
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity Dimensions
rated current n max (A) With-
cu at 500 V AC (kA) or Fixed-mounted, drawable
cc at 300 V DC (kA) 3- /4-pole 3- /4-pole
704 / 914 704 / 914 Width

6300
Size III
5000 434 / 434 460 / 460 Height

H C
100 150 (3p)
4000 130 (4p) 291 / 291 385 / 385 Depth
4000
3200 460 / 590 460 / 590 Width
2500
Size II
2000
434 / 434 460 / 460 Height
1600 DC N S H
1250 30 66 80 100
1000 291 / 291 385 / 385 Depth
800
15
1600 320 / 410 320 / 410 Width
1250
Size I
1000 434 / 434 460 / 460 Height

N S
800 55 66
630
291 / 291 385 / 385 Depth
The dimension for the depth of the circuit breaker is from the circuit breaker rear to the inner surface of the closed switchgear door. NSE0_00887 o
Overview of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers/

non-automatic air circuit breakers
Coordinated dimensions
Versions
The dimensions of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers only differ in
• Rated currents: 630 A to 6300 A terms of the width of the device which depends on the number
• 3 sizes for different rated current ranges (see illustration of poles and the size.
"Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Due to the nature of the design, the dimensions of devices with
Circuit Breakers") a withdrawable version are determined by the dimensions of the
• 3- and 4-pole versions guide frames, which are slightly larger.
• Rated operational voltage up to 690 V AC and 1000 V DC. Non-automatic air circuit breakers
Special versions up to 1000 V AC and 1150 V AC available
• 4 different switching capacity classes in the range from 55 kA A special version of circuit breaker is utilized as a non-automatic
to 150 kA for AC applications and one switching capacity air circuit breaker. The non-automatic air circuit breakers are de-
class for DC applications. signed without an solid-state release system and do not perform
any protection duties for the system.
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are supplied complete with
operating mechanism (manual operating mechanism with me- One potential application is the use as a bus coupler in systems
chanical closing), solid-state release and auxiliary switches with parallel feed-ins.
(2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts in the standard version), and The versions and features can be selected according to those of
can be equipped with auxiliary releases. the circuit breakers.
Installation types Operating mechanisms
Fixed-mounted or withdrawable version The circuit breakers are available with various optional operating
mechanisms:
Ambient temperatures
• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing (stan-
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are climate-proof according dard design)
to IEC 60068-2-30. They are intended for use in enclosed areas • Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical
where no severe operating conditions (e. g. dust, corrosive va- closing
pors, damaging gases) are present.
• Motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electri-
When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures cal closing
must be provided.
The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used
for synchronization tasks.
15/6 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Safety and reliability
Fixed-mounted circuit breakers
To protect the circuit breakers and plant against unauthorized
switching as well as the maintenance and operator personnel, the
system contains many locking devices. Others can be retrofitted.
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 8 b
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 9 b
Other safety features include:
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 9 a
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 7 b
• Infeed from above or below, as required

• Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed,
Horizontal Front connection with single Vertical as standard
connection hole or double hole connection
• Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against move-
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames ment, as standard
• High degree of protection with cover IP55
• Mechanical reclosing lockout after overload or short-circuit
release as standard
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 1 b
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 0 b
• The circuit breaker is always equipped with the required num-

N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 3 b
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 2 b
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 7 b
ber of auxiliary supply connectors

Standard version
Horizontal Front connection with single Vertical Flange SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with the following
connection hole or double hole connection connection
features as standard:
Main circuit connections – connection types • Mechanical ON and OFF pushbutton
Main circuit connections • Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing
All circuit breakers are equipped with horizontal main circuit • Switch position indicator
connections on the rear for up to 5000 A as standard (horizontal • Ready-to-close indicator
connection to busbars). Exception: Circuit breakers of size II • Memory status indicator
with max. rated current 4000 A.
• Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC
15
Circuit breakers with a max. rated current of 6300 A and circuit
breakers size II with a max. rated current of 4000 A are equipped • Rear horizontal main circuit connections for fixed-mounted and
with vertical main connections (for upright busbars). withdrawable versions up to 5000 A, and rear vertical main cir-
cuit connections for 6300 A applications and size II with 4000 A
The following options are available, with all combinations of top
and bottom connections possible: • For 4-pole circuit breakers, the fourth pole (N) is installed on
• Accessible from the front, single hole (for vertically installed the left and is 100 % loadable with the rated current
busbars) • Contact erosion indicator for the main contacts
• Accessible from the front, double hole (holes according to • Auxiliary circuit plug-in system with SIGUT screw terminals
DIN 43673) (for vertically installed busbars) Delivery inclusive of all auxiliary circuit connectors to internal
• At the rear, vertical (for vertically installed busbars) features including coding device for the prevention of incor-
• Connecting flange (for direct connection to guide frame up to rect installation of auxiliary supply connectors for fixed-
4000 A). mounted circuit breakers
• Mechanical "tripped" indicator for solid-state release system
Connection using Screwless
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 6 b
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 7 5 b
screw terminals connection method • Mechanical reclosing lockout after tripping operation
system (SIGUT) (tension springs)
(standard) (optional) • Operator panel cannot be taken off with the circuit breaker in
the ON position
Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections Additional features of the withdrawable version:
• Main contacts:
Auxiliary circuit connections Laminated receptacles in the guide frame, penetration blades
The type of connection for the auxiliary switches depends on the on the withdrawable circuit breaker
type of installation: • Position indicator in the operator panel of the withdrawable
• Withdrawable version: The internal auxiliary switches are con- circuit breaker
nected to the male connector on the switch side. When fully in- • Captive manual crank handle for moving the withdrawable
serted, the connector makes a connection with the sliding circuit breaker
contact module (see "Design", graphic "Guide Frame") in the
guide frame. Various adapters can then be used to complete • Guide frame with guide rails for easy moving of the withdraw-
the wiring (see the graphic "Connection Options for Auxiliary able circuit breaker
Circuit Connections"). • The withdrawable circuit breaker can be locked to prevent it
• Fixed mounting: In this case the auxiliary supply connectors being pushed out of position
are engaged directly onto the circuit breaker. The connectors • The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved when it is
are equipped with coding pins that prevent them being mistak- in the ON position
enly interchanged. • Coding of the rated current between the guide frame and the
Operator panel withdrawable circuit breaker
The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cut-out in the Standards

door providing access to all control elements and displays with SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:
the control cabinet door closed. • IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2
The operator panels for all circuit breakers (fixed-mounted/with- • EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2
drawable versions, 3-/4-pole) are identical. The operator panel • Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30
ensures degree of protection IP41.
Versions according to UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.
For further specifications, see Appendix.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/7

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Withdrawable short-circuit, grounding, and bridging An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit
units breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer
available.
Portable positively-driven grounding and short-circuit devices
are used for the disconnected system sections to verify isolation Undervoltage releases
from the supply at the workplace.
The undervoltage release causes the circuit breaker to be
Withdrawable grounding units allow simple and comfortable opened if the operational voltage falls below a certain value or is
grounding. They are simply inserted into the guide frames in not applied. The circuit breaker cannot be closed manually or by
place of the corresponding withdrawable circuit breakers. This means of an electrical ON command if the undervoltage release
ensures that these devices are always first connected with the is not connected to the operational voltage. The undervoltage re-
grounding electrode and then with the components to be lease has no delay as standard. A delay can be set by the cus-
grounded. tomer in the range between td < 80 ms and td < 200 ms.
The grounding terminals are fitted to the side of the switch enclo- In addition, an undervoltage release with a delay in the range
sure and establish the connection when inserted into the guide from 0.2 to 3.2 s is available.
frame.
Closing solenoid
Short-time current of the kA 15 (500 ms)

The closing solenoid is used to close the circuit breaker electri-
grounding terminal cally by means of a local electrical ON command or by a remote
Rated operational voltage V 1000 (690 for size I)
unit.
Standards EN 61230 Motorized operating mechanisms
The operating mechanism is used to load the storage spring au-
All withdrawable terminals are short-circuited and grounded on tomatically.
delivery.
The operating mechanism is activated if the storage spring has
Qualified electricians can easily convert it to a withdrawable been unloaded and the control voltage is available.
bridging unit by following the enclosed instructions.
It is switched off automatically after loading. This does not affect
In addition, the withdrawable unit can be adapted to various manual operation of the storage spring.
rated currents of a size.
15
Indicators, signals, and control elements

Withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit
Motor shutdown switch
The withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit consists of a
breaker enclosure with penetration blades which are connected Control switch for switching off the motorized operating mecha-
with the short-circuiting link. nism (automatic loading).
Depending on the version, the short-circuiting links are arranged Operating cycles counter
at the top or bottom. The grounding and short-circuit connec- The motorized operating mechanism can be supplied with a 5-
tions are established when the device is inserted. digit operating cycles counter. The display is incremented by "1"
It must be ensured that the side to be short-circuited and as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded.
grounded is not live. For this reason it is recommended that the Resetting the manual tripped signal
withdrawable unit is only wound in when the door is closed.
When the circuit breaker has tripped, this is indicated by the pro-
Withdrawable bridging unit truding red mechanical tripped indicator on the ETU. When the
The withdrawable bridging unit consists of a breaker enclosure mechanical tripped indicator is activated, the tripping solenoid
in which all disconnection components and the operating mech- and tripped signal are reset. If this display is to be reset remotely,
anism have been replaced with simple connections between the the reset button can be equipped with a reset solenoid.
upper and lower contacts. This option allows the circuit breaker to be reset both manually
and electrically.
Auxiliary releases
Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout
Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time.
The following are available: When the ETU is activated, reclosing of the circuit breaker is pre-
vented until the release is either electrically or manually reset. If
1 shunt release the "Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout" option is used, the
or 1 undervoltage release pre-tensioned circuit breaker is ready to close immediately after
or 2 shunt releases tripping. Resetting the manual tripped indicator is not included
or 1 shunt release in this option.
+ 1 undervoltage release
Tripped signal switch
Signal switch for auxiliary releases
If the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short-cir-
One signaling contact is used for each auxiliary release to deter- cuit, ground fault or extended protection function, the tripped
mine the positions of the auxiliary releases. signal switch can indicate this. This signal switch is available as
Shunt releases an option. If the circuit breaker is used for communication, this
option is supplied as standard.
When the operational voltage is connected to the shunt release,
the circuit breaker is opened immediately. The shunt release is Ready-to-close indicator switch
available in the versions 5 % ON period for overexcitation and The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with an opti-
100 % ON period for permanent excitation. This means that it is cal ready-to-close indicator as standard. In addition, the ready-
also possible to block the circuit breaker against being jogged to-close status can be transmitted by means of a signal switch
into closing. as an option. If the switch is used for communication, the signal
switch is supplied as standard.
15/8 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Circuit breakers
(2 8 ) (1 ) (1) Arc chute

(2) Carrying handle
(2 ) (3) Labeling plate
(2 7 ) (4) Motor shutdown switch (option) or
"Electrical ON" (option)
(5) Name plate for circuit breaker
(2 6 ) (3 )
(6) Memory status indicator
(4 ) (7) "Mechanical ON" button
(2 5 ) (8) Rated current indication
(5 )
(9) Positioning pictogram
(2 4 ) (10) Operating cycles counter (option)
(6 )
(11) Hand-operated lever
(2 3 )
(12) Crank handle
(2 2 ) (7 ) (13) Withdrawable unit drive shaft
(14) Equipment plate
(2 1 )
(15) Ground terminal
(8 ) (16) Position indicator
(17) Table for ground-fault protection
(2 0 ) (9 )
(18) Safety lock for crank handle (option)
(19) Mechanical unlocking of crank handle
(1 9 ) (1 0 ) (option)
(1 1 ) (20) Solid-state release
(1 8 ) (21) Rated current module
(22) "Mechanical OFF" button or
(1 7 ) (1 2 )
"EMERGENCY-STOP" mushroom
15
pushbutton (option)
(1 3 ) (23) Ready-to-close indicator
(1 6 )
(1 4 ) (24) Switch position indicator
(1 5 ) (25) "Tripped" indicator (reset button)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 5 b
(26) "Secure OFF" locking device (option)
(27) Operator panel
(28) Male connector for auxiliary circuit
connections
Guide frames
(1) Arc chute cover

(option)
(2) Blow-out openings
(1 )
(3) Opening for crane hook
(2 ) (4) Shutter (option)
(5) Locking device (shutter) (option)
(6) Type plate for guide frame
(1 8 ) (3 )
(7) Isolating contacts
(8) Ground terminal Ø 14 mm
(9) Locking device for racking rail
(10) Locking device against movement when
(4 ) control cabinet door is open (option)
(1 7 )
(11) Door interlocking for guide frame (option)
(5 ) (12) Racking rail
(13) Factory-set rated current coding
(6 )
(14) Sliding contact for breaker grounding
(1 6 ) (option)
(7 ) (15) Equipment-dependent coding (option)
(1 5 ) (16) Shutter actuator (optional)
(17) Position indicator switch (optional)
(1 4 )
(18) Sliding contact module for auxiliary
(8 ) conductors (number depends on
(1 3 ) equipment)
(1 2 )
(9 )
(1 1 )
(1 0 ) N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 6 6 b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/9

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Locking devices Sealing devices
Locking device in OFF position Sealing cap for "Electrical ON" button
This function prevents closing of the circuit breaker and com- The "Electrical ON button" is equipped with a sealing cap as
plies to the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 standard.
(VDE 0113) - disconnector unit. This lockout only affects this cir-
cuit breaker. Sealing cap for "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" button
If the circuit breaker is replaced, closing is no longer prevented The locking set contains covering caps which can be sealed.
unless the new circuit breaker is also protected against unautho- Sealing device for solid-state releases
rized closing.
The transparent cover can be sealed. The parameter setting
To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access. Openings
opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker allow access to the query and test button.
is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position. Locking mechanisms
Locking device for "Electrical ON" Locking mechanism against movement for withdrawable circuit
(see graphic "Circuit breakers") breakers when the control cabinet door is open
This prevents unauthorized electrical closing from the operator The crank handle is blocked when the control cabinet door is
panel. Mechanical closing and remote closing remain possible. open and cannot be removed. The withdrawable circuit breaker
The lock is only activated when the key is removed. cannot be moved. The lock only affects the inserted crank
handle.
Locking device for "Mechanical ON"
(see graphic "Circuit breakers") Locking of the control cabinet door
This prevents unauthorized mechanical closing. The mechanical The control cabinet door cannot be opened if
ON button can only be activated if the key is inserted (key oper- • The fixed-mounted circuit breaker is closed (the blocking
ation). Closing with the "Electrical ON" button and remote closing signal is transmitted via the Bowden wire) or
remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is • The withdrawable circuit breaker is in the connected position.
removed.
15
Blocking mechanism using "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons

"Secure OFF" circuit breaker-independent locking device
against unauthorized closing The "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons are covered with a cap
which only allows actuation with a tool. These covering caps are
This special switch-independent function for withdrawable cir- part of the locking set.
cuit breakers prevents closing and fulfills the specifications for
main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) – disconnector unit. Un- Optional equipment for guide frames
authorized closing remains impossible even after the circuit
breaker has been exchanged. Shutters
To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be opened. The The sealing strips of the shutter seal the laminated contacts of
locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed. the guide frame when the withdrawable circuit breaker is re-
The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety moved and therefore implement touch protection.
key can be removed only in the "OFF" position. The sealing strips can be manually opened using the strip
Locking device for crank handle levers.
Prevents removal of the crank. The circuit breaker is protected The position of the sealing strips can be locked in various posi-
against movement. The lock is only activated when the key is tions using padlocks for securing against tampering.
removed.
Locking device for "Mechanical OFF"
Prevents unauthorized mechanical opening from the operator
panel. The "Mechanical OFF pushbutton" can only be activated
if the key is inserted (key operation). Remote opening remains
possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for hand-operated lever
The hand-operated lever can be locked with a padlock. The stor-
age spring cannot be loaded manually.
Locking device against resetting the "tripped" indicator
A lockable cover prevents manual resetting of the "tripped" indi-
cator after overcurrent tripping. This locking device is supplied
together with the transparent cover for solid-state releases.
15/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide Equipment-dependent coding
frame
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames can be retrofit-
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames are equipped ted with an equipment-dependent coding unit.
with a rated current coding unit as standard.
This allows different designs of circuit breakers and guide
This ensures that only circuit breakers whose penetration blades frames to be uniquely assigned. If the circuit breaker and guide
are suited to the laminated contacts of the guide frame can be frame have been assigned different codes, the circuit breaker
inserted into a guide frame (see diagram below). cannot be inserted.
36 different coding options can be selected.
Position indicator switch for guide frames
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 3 1 a
The guide frame can be equipped with position indicator
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 3 2 a
switches. These can be used to determine the position of the cir-
cuit breaker in the guide frame.
(1 )
Two versions are available:
(4 ) • Option 1
Connected position 1 CO contact,
(2 )
disconnected position 1 CO contact.
(3 ) (5 )
• Option 2
(1) Guide frame, interior of l/h side; interior of r/h side similar Connected position 3 CO contacts,
(2) Coding pin on racking rail in guide frame test position 2 CO contacts,
disconnected position 1 CO contact.
(3) Racking rail
(4) Withdrawable circuit breaker, r/h side; l/h side similar
(5) Coding pin on guide frame
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame
15
Positions of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame
Display Position indicator Main circuit Auxiliary circuit Control cabinet Shutters
door
Maintenance position (2 ) CONNECT
Disconnected Disconnected Open Closed
(1 )
TEST
(4 )
DISCON
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 3 3 a
NSE01037
Disconnected position CONNECT

Disconnected Disconnected Closed Closed
(3 )
TEST
DISCON
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 3 4 a
NSE01038
Test position CONNECT

Disconnected Connected Closed Closed
TEST
DISCON
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 3 5 a
NSE01039
Connected position CONNECT

Connected Connected Closed Open
TEST
DISCON
N S E 0 0 1 0 3 6 a NSE01040
(1) Auxiliary circuit (2) Main circuit (3) Control cabinet door (4) Shutter
Phase barriers Door sealing frame and cover

The plant engineering company can manufacture phase barriers SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers have degree of protection IP20
made of insulating material for the arcing fault barriers. The rear as standard. However, if the switchgear is to be equipped with a
panel of the fixed-mounted circuit breakers or guide frames are higher degree of protection, a door sealing frame with IP41 and
equipped with guide grooves. a cover with IP55 are available.
Arc chute cover
The arc chute cover is available as optional equipment for the
guide frame. It protects switchgear components which are lo-
cated directly above the circuit breaker.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/11

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
■ Function
NSE0_00882b
NSE0_00881b
NSE0_00880b
R
R R
s d
s d
J s d
i J s d
g
J g
N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 5 0 c N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 5 1 b N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 5 2 b
ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B

Functions of the solid-state releases
15
Basic protection functions

Overload protection L ✔ ✔ ✔
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S -- ✔ ✔
Instantaneous short-circuit protection I ✔ ✔ ✔
Neutral conductor protection N -- -- ✔
Ground-fault protection G -- -- ✔
Additional functions
N-conductor protection can be switched on/off -- -- ✔
N-conductor protection adjustable -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Non-delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --
Load monitoring -- -- --
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection adjustable ✔ -- --
Overload protection switchable to I4t -- -- --
Overload protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Selectable parameter sets -- -- --
Parameterization and display

Parameterization through rotary coding switches (10 steps) ✔ ✔ ✔
Parameterization through communication (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization through user interface of ETU (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization of the extended protection functions -- -- --
LCD alphanumerical -- -- --
Graphic LCD -- -- --
Measurement function
Measurement function Plus -- -- --
Communication
CubicleBUS -- -- --
Communication through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Communication through MODBUS -- -- --
Communication through Ethernet -- -- --
✔ Standard -- Not available ❑ Optional
Detailed information about the functions of the solid-state releases is given in the following.
15/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
ETU76B
Rating Plug
=
12
NSE0_00886c
NSE0_00883b
IR IR
tR tR
Isd Isd
t sd t sd
Ig Ig
Ii Ii
tg tg
NSE0 00953a NSE0 00953a
ETU45B ETU76B
15
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
❑ ❑
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
-- ✔
-- ✔
✔ --
-- ✔
-- ✔
❑ ❑
❑ --
-- ✔
❑ ❑
✔ ✔
❑ ❑
❑ ❑
❑ ❑
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/13

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Solid-state releases (ETU) Tripped indicator/
The solid-state release is controlled by a microprocessor and Reset button
operates independently of an auxiliary voltage. It enables sys-
tems to be adapted to the different protection requirements of
distribution systems, motors, transformers and generators.
Communication capabilities
LCD alpha-
The international standard PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS can be numeric
used to transmit data such as current values, switching states, with 15°
reasons for tripping etc. to central computers. inclination
and rotatable
Data acquisition and energy management are possible in con- through 180°
junction with the Plus measurement function.
Slide switch
A new internal circuit breaker data bus allows switchboard panel Rated current for switchable
communication between the circuit breaker and secondary de- module/ overload
vices in the circuit breaker section: rating plug characteristic
curve
• Actuation of analog displays
• Facility to test the communication build-up with circuit
breakers
• Display of tripping state and tripping reasons
• Input module for reading in further switchgear panel signals Ground-fault
protection
and for transmission of these signals to the PROFIBUS DP or module (retro-
MODBUS fittable)
• Various output modules for displaying measured values
This means that it is not only possible to monitor the device re-
motely, but also to transmit current values from the entire system
and perform switching operations remotely.
15
I2t and I4t characteristic curve for overload protection

Example of configuration for ETU45B
The best protection for the whole switchgear is achieved by set-
ting the tripping characteristic curve to an optimum value. In or-
der to achieve optimal discrimination for upstream fuses or me-
dium voltage protection systems, the inclination of the
characteristic curve can be selected for the overload range.
The overload protection L (long time protection) for the solid-
state releases ETU45B and ETU76B allows the characteristic
curve to be switched between I2t and I4t.
The I4t characteristic improves discrimination for downstream
circuit breakers and fuses.
Solid-state releases ETU
Modularity has also been strictly emphasized during the devel-
opment of the solid-state releases. These are some of the
modules which can be easily retrofitted at any time:
• Ground-fault protection module
• Communication
• Measurement function
• Display
• Rated current module (Rating Plug)
This allows quick adaptation to new local mains specifications.
In addition, innovative functions have been included in the ETUs.
Rated current module/Rating Plug
The rated current module is an exchangeable module which al- Measurement function Plus
lows the user to reduce the rated device current so as to adapt
it optimally to the plant; e. g. if a new plant section is taken into
operation. The rated current module must be selected to fit the Selectable parameters
rated current of the plant.
In the case of quick changes of power supply conditions,
e. g. for switchovers from transformer to generator operation or
if a section of the supply is disconnected when the shift
changes, SENTRON 3WL allows the relevant protection param-
eters to be quickly adapted to the new conditions.
The ETUs contain two independent tripping characteristic
curves (parameter sets). The switchover is completed within
200 ms and is performed with the help of an external signal.
15/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
ETU15B solid-state release
Application:
Option: safety lock
prevents pressing of Simple building and
Mechanical RESET reset button after system protection without time-se-
overcurrent release
for reclosing lockout lective coordination up to 4000 A.
and mechanical
tripped indicator
Not to be used for size III.
Features:
• Adjustable overload protection
with I2t characteristic curve
Indicator: overcurrent
release activated
with preset delay time
tR = 10 seconds at 6 × IR
Indicator: overload alarm Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release • Instantaneous short-circuit pro-
tection adjustable in the range
Rotary switch for setting
value, overload release
2 ... 8 × In
• Overload display
• Protection function is set by
value, instantaneous
means of the rotary coding
Sealing ring
short-circuit release switch
For technical details see the table
"Functional overview of the
solid-state release system"
NSE0_00954b
under "Technical specifications".

Test socket
15
Application:
Option: safety lock
prevents pressing of Classical building, motor and sys-
Mechanical RESET reset button after tem protection with time-selective
overcurrent release
for reclosing lockout coordination for up to 6300 A
and mechanical
tripped indicator Features:
• Adjustable overload protection
with I2t characteristic curve
Delay time tR =
ETU25B 10 seconds at 6 × IR
release activated
Indicator: overload alarm • Short-time delayed short-circuit
Rating Plug Indicator: fault in
Rated current module
overcurrent release protection adjustable in the
range 1.25 ... 12 × In and
Rotary switch for setting Indicator: cause of release
value, overload release • Instantaneous short-circuit
Rotary switch for setting Rotary switch for delay, protection preset
value, instantaneous short-circuit release to 20 × In, max. 50 kA
short-circuit release
• Can be adapted at any time to
Short-circuit protection
fixed setting
Sealing ring the required plant currents
through retrofittable rated cur-
NSE0_00955b
rent module, thus ensuring over-

Query pushbutton load protection in the range from
Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton 100 A to 6300 A
Test socket • Overload display
• Indicates the reason for tripping
by means of an LED
• Test facility for the release
• Protection functions are
set by means of the
rotary coding switch
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/15

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Application:
Option: safety lock
prevents pressing of Classical building, motor and sys-
Mechanical RESET reset button after tem protection with time-selective
overcurrent release
for reclosing lockout coordination for up to 6300 A
and mechanical
tripped indicator Features:
NSE0_00956c
The same as ETU25B but also
• Reversible neutral conductor
release activated
ETU27B N-conductor protection protection
on/off
Indicator: overload alarm
Rating Plug
OFF ON
• Permanently integrated ground-
Indicator: fault in
Rated current module overcurrent release
fault protection. Calculation of
the ground-fault current through
Rotary switch for setting N
Indicator: cause of release
vectorial summation current
value, overload release formation
Rotary switch for setting Rotary switch for delay,
value, instantaneous short-circuit release For technical details see the table
short-circuit release "Functional overview of the
Short-circuit protection Sealing ring solid-state release system"
fixed setting OFF
Rotary switch for delay,
earth-fault protection
value, earth-fault protection
Query pushbutton
Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton
Test socket
15

Mechanical RESET Option: safety lock Application:
for reclosing lockout prevents pressing of
and mechanical reset button after Low-cost all-round system for intelligent
tripped indicator overcurrent release buildings and all types of industrial applica-
Scroll up
Option: alphanumeric display tions – "CubicleBUS integrated"
Indicators:
Overcurrent release Scroll down Features:
activated Indicator: fault in
Overload alarm overcurrent release The same as ETU25B but also
COMMUNICATION Thermal memory on/off • Adjustable time-lag class
EXPANDED ETU45B N-conductor protection on/off
OFF ON
for overload protection
Setting value
Rated current module N-conductor overload • Selectable characteristic for overload and
Rating Plug
=
Rotary switch for setting Transfer of overload short-delayed short-circuit range (current
value, overload release characteristic 2 t / 4t
1
1
discrimination) for more accurate discrimi-
Rotary switch for setting 1
1 Rotary switch for delay, nation adaptation to upstream fuses and
value, instantaneous 1
overload release
short-circuit release protective devices
Rotary switch for delay,
12
Rotary switch for setting short-circuit release • Thermal image as restart protection for
value, short-circuit Indicator: cause of release
protection tripped motor outgoing feeders
Sealing ring
Selector for
Option: earth-fault module
• Reversible and adjustable neutral conduc-
earth-fault protection SI tor protection
Indicator: earth-fault alarm
Rotary switch for setting g
value, earth-fault • Modular ground-fault protection module

protection Indicator: earth-fault tripped with alarm and tripping functions which can
Rotary switch for setting Rotary switch for delay, be adjusted separately
value, earth-fault alarm earth-fault protection t g / 2
tg
Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton • Communication interface,
Query pushbutton Test socket measurement function Plus, optional con-
NSE0_00957b
nection of external modules or for
retrofitting
• Storage of events and causes for tripping
for detailed fault analysis
• Extended protection function possible with
measurement function
• Optional high-contrast display with viewing
angle adjustment option
• The protection functions can be set by
means of a rotary coding switch or slide
switch
"Technical specifications".
15/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Application:
Mechanical RESET Option: safety lock
for reclosing lockout prevents pressing of The multi-talent with graphical
and mechanical reset button after display for system analysis –
tripped indicator ETU76B overcurrent release
"CubicleBUS integrated"
Features:
The same as ETU45B but also
Indicators: including
Overcurrent release
activated Graphical display • Two protection parameter sets
Overload alarm
COMMUNICATION
which can be stored separately
EXPANDED in the release (switchover is per-
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release formed by means of external sig-
nal)
Indicator: cause of release Rating Plug
Control keys for setting • With overload protection which
he release parameters can be deactivated for operation
Rated current module in modern drive technology
Option: earth-fault module Indicators: • Adjustable delay of
Ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault tripped delayed short-circuit protection
Fields for noting up to 4000 ms
setting values Fields for noting
setting values
• Neutral conductor protection ad-
Test pushbutton justable up to IN = 200 % In
Clear pushbutton
Query pushbutton Test socket
• Setting of protection functions by
means of Breaker Data Adapter
NSE0_00960b (BDA) or via communications in-
terface
15
• Graphical display of all
parameters and events/
curve trends
• Graphics display with high con-
trast, backlit display, and sleep
mode
Ground-fault protection Ground-fault releases "G" sense fault currents that flow to ground
and that can cause fire in the plant. Multiple circuit breakers con-
Selector for nected in series can have their delay times adjusted so as to pro-
Indicators: Ground-fault
ground-fault
alarm vide graduated discrimination.
detection
GFM AT 45B Ground-fault
Rotary switch 1
tripped
When setting the parameters for the solid-state release it is pos-
for setting
value,
g TRIP ALARM ALARM J g (s) 1 2J g sible to choose between "alarm" and "trip" in the event that the
ground-fault G A .5 .1
set current value is exceeded. The reason for tripping is indi-
B .4 .2
protection
C TRIP .3 .3 cated by means of an LED when the query button is activated.
D .2 .4
OFF Rotary switch
E .1 .5
NSE0_00962a
for setting The ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release versions can be
Rotary switch value, ground-
for setting value fault protection delay retrofitted with a ground-fault protection module. This ground
ground-fault alarm J g/1
2
J g
fault protection function is integrated in ETU27B solid-state re-
leases.
GFM AT 45B ground-fault module
Field for Indicators: Ground-fault

noting alarm
transfer GFM AT 55B-76B
g 1 Ground-fault
ground-fault tripped
detection ALARM ALARM
1 g= A
TRIP TRIP 1 2J
1 g= A J g= ms
Fields for Fields for
noting setting NSE0_00964a
noting setting
values values
GFM AT 55B-76B ground-fault module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/17

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Measurement method Setting
Vectorial summation current formation (measurement method 1) How the module is set depends on the measurement method
used (see above):
The three phase currents and the N conductor current are mea-
sured directly. Measurement method 1: in position .
The solid-state release determines the ground-fault current by Measurement method 2: in position .
means of vectorial summation current formation for the three
phase currents and the N conductor current. This setting can be implemented for the solid-state release ver-
sion ETU76B with Menu/Comm.
Direct measurement of the ground-fault current
(measurement method 2) Ground-fault protection with I2t characteristic curve
A standard current transformer with the following data is used for With the exception of the ETU27B solid-state release, all
measurement of the ground-fault current: 1200 A/1 A, Class 1 versions of the ground-fault modules are supplied with an I2t
(the internal load of SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 ). The current trans- characteristic curve which can be activated.
former can be installed directly in the grounded neutral point of Selection criteria for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
a transformer.
Basic criteria for selecting circuit breakers are:
• Max. short-circuit current at place of installation of circuit
L1 breaker I k max.
L2 This value determines the short-circuit breaking capacity
SENTRON WL
L3 or short-circuit current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker.
N • It is compared with the value Icu, Ics, Icw of the circuit breaker
T5 PE and essentially determines the size of the circuit breaker.
NSE 00946 See illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit
Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".
• Rated current In which is to flow through the branch circuit.
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the N conductor This value must not be larger than the maximum rated current
for the circuit breaker.
L1
15
The rated current for the SENTRON 3WL is set with the rated
L2 current module. See "Design", illustration "Overview of
SENTRON WL
L3 SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit
N Breakers".
• Ambient temperature
T6 for the circuit breaker.
PE This is usually the control cabinet internal temperature.
T6: 1200 A/1 A NSE 00947
• Design of the circuit breaker
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral • Minimum short-circuit current
point of the transformer which flows through the switching device. The release must
still detect this value as a short-circuit and must respond by
L1 tripping.
L2
L3
Protection functions of the circuit breaker.
SENTRON WL
N
These are determined by the selection of the
corresponding solid-state release, see the table
T6
"Functions of the solid-state releases" under "Functions".
PE
NSE 00948
T6: 1200 A/1 A
4-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral

point of the transformer
15/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
SENTRON 3WL for DC applications
This version of the 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker is suit-
able for direct current applications. The external protective de-
vice DIGmat S100 provides adjustable overload and short-
circuit protection for the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit
breaker.
This is based on the measuring chain of a shunt resistor and the
DIGmat S100 tripping unit. Shunt resistors are available for
1000 A, 2000 A and 4000 A (special ranges on request). They
are in accordance with DIN 43703 and have a class accuracy
of 0.5.
A measuring-circuit voltage of 60 mV DC is picked off for rated
current In.
DIGmat S100
The measuring-circuit voltage is a linear image of the primary
current.
The DIGmat S100 tripping unit monitors the image of the primary • Short-circuit protection:
current thus supplied and compares it with the tripping charac- Setting range Ii = 1.25 × IR up to max. 4 × In
teristic curve set on the device. The parameter settings on the If the set value is exceeded, tripping occurs in less than
DIGmat S100 apply also for DC feedbacks. 50 ms.
Reversing duty is possible therefore. In = Rated current of the circuit breaker
The tripping characteristic curve is determined and described IR = Set current value of the adjustable overload release
by the following variables: tR = Assigned tripping time of the overload trip
Ii = Instantaneous tripping current of the adjustable short-
• Overload protection: circuit releases
Setting range IR = 0.4 ... 1.0 In
The curve has a I2t characteristic. The components are available only from the company
The tripping time tR is selectable between 2 and 10 s, with tR mat – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik
15
defined for 6 × IR. (for address see "Appendix" => "External Partners").
■ Configuration
Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking • The bending radii of the Bowden wire must be greater than
500 mm.
The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for
one or two SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers and can be adapted • The sum of all bending angles along the Bowden wire must not
easily to the corresponding versions. The fixed-mounted and exceed 640°.
withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and • In a vertical arrangement of circuit breakers to be interlocked,
can therefore be used in a mixed configuration in an installation. the interlocking mechanisms must be in line.
This also applies to 3WN6 circuit breakers. • Circuit breakers to be interlocked must be arranged so that
The circuit breakers can be mounted alongside each other or Bowden cables can be optimally installed in compliance with
one above the other, whereby the distance of the circuit breakers the conditions mentioned in the above points.
is determined solely by the length of the Bowden wire (lengths: • The installed Bowden wire must be fixed (with cable ties or the
2 m/3 m/4.5 m). Interlock signals are looped through using the like) before the interlock is adjusted.
Bowden wires. Interlocking is only effective in the connected po-
sition in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers. The mechan- • Select the width of switchgear cubicle to allow enough free-
ical endurance of the Bowden cables is 10 000 operating cycles. dom of movement for adjusting the interlock!
• Openings and cut-outs in system elements must be designed
Minimum requirements must be fulfilled in the switchgear for the so that Bowden wires are not changed in direction or ob-
interlocking to function: structed when they are passed through.
• Bowden wires must be installed as far as possible in a straight
line with minimum bending.
Mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers – examples
Mutual interlocking of two Interlocking between three Mutual interlocking of three Interlocking of three circuit
circuit breakers circuit breakers circuit breakers breakers, two of them mutual
G G G
S1 S2 S1 S3 S1 S3
S1 S2 S3
S2 S1 S2 S3 S2
NSE01041 NSE01042 NSE01043 NSE01044 NSE01045
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/19

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Communication-capable circuit breakers
PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7 PC with Switch ES Power

data acquisition and SENTRON 3WL/3VL parameterization
processing and visualization tool through
PROFIBUS DP
Output device
Ethernet/ e.g. notebook
Intranet/ with browser
Zone Selective
Interlocking module
Digital output module
Relay
Relay, configurable
Analog output module
Digital input module

Internet
COM15
BSS
ETU
Measurement-
BDA function Plus
NSE0_01820a
BDA Plus
Communication with PROFIBUS DP

15
MODBUS Master Configuration and

PLC or monitoring software display software
MODBUS
Output device
Ethernet/ e.g. notebook
Intranet/ with browser
Zone Selective
Interlocking module
Relay
Relay, configurable
Analog output module

Internet
COM16
BSS
ETU
Measurement
BDA
function Plus
NSE0_01894
BDAPlus
Communication with MODBUS

The requirements for power distribution in terms of communica- The high level of modularity of the system allows communication
tion capability, data transparency, flexibility and integration are functions to be retrofitted at any time (e. g. the measurement
constantly increasing. An integrated and modular communica- function). Similarly, the upgrade of a non-communication-capa-
tion architecture was designed for the SENTRON 3WL to ensure ble SENTRON 3WL (e .g. changeover from ETU25B to ETU45B
that it can satisfy these requirements. with CubicleBUS) can be carried out easily on site in the plant.
All modules connected to the CubicleBUS can directly access
The core component of this architecture is the CubicleBUS, the existing source data of the circuit breaker, which guarantees
which links together all of the intelligent components within the the quickest possible access to information and response to
SENTRON 3WL and enables the easy and safe connection of events.
other additional external components to the circuit breaker. The
CubicleBUS is already incorporated and pre-connected in all Furthermore, additional external modules (including digital in-
complete circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases. puts/outputs, analog outputs) can be connected to the
CubicleBUS to provide cost-effective solutions for the automa-
tion of further devices in the switchgear.
15/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
SENTRON 3WL communication-capable circuit breakers
Function Solid-state Breaker PROFI- Mea- Analog Digital Digital ZSI Breaker Breaker
release version Status BUS sure- output output input mod- Data Data
ETU45B ETU76B Sensor com- ment mod- mod- modules Adapter Adapter
munica- func- ules ules ules Plus
tion tion
port Plus
Functions of the communication-capable SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Indication of measured values in release (current
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
only)
Indication of measured values in release
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
(U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.)
Indication of measured values (current only),
-- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
parameter, diagnostic values etc. on display
Indication of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.),
-- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
parameters, diagnostic values etc. in release
Output of measured values (current only)
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door
Output of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) to
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door
Output of digital signals
(e. g. reason for tripping, alarm signals, status) ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
through contacts
Automatic changeover between
-- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏
parameter sets A and B
Read in digital signals and forward to
✓ ✓ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏
PROFIBUS/MODBUS
Transmission of switch information
✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓
on HTML basis locally to a PC
Transmission of switch information
15
✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓
on HTML basis through Ethernet
Short-time grading control for
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏
S tripping and G protection
Local display of harmonic analysis and waveform
-- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
memory
Local storage of harmonic analysis and waveform
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
memory and transmission through PROFIBUS
Read out protection parameters through PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Read out and adjust protection parameters through
-- ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
PROFIBUS
✓ Required ❏ Not necessary for this function, optionally combinable
Function can optionally be taken over by more than one release. -- Function not available
Function can optionally be taken over by one of these modules.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/21

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Data that can be transmitted over the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS or the Breaker Data Adapter
All SENTRON 3WLs with ETU45B, ETU76B (CubicleBUS integrated)
Transmittable circuit breaker data

BSS BDA BSS COM15/COM16
Order code (Order No. of circuit breaker + "–Z") F01 F02/F12
Order No. +"BDA/BDAPLUS"
Order No.
Potential applications
Transmission of circuit breaker data to PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS and integration into
higher-level visualization systems are possible -- ✔
e. g. in PCS7, Power Management Systems, WinCC (incl. add-ons like the text message radio server)
Transmission of circuit breaker data and software (i. e. HTML pages with data) to a local output
device, or remotely through Ethernet/Intranet/Internet (without the possibility of integration into
higher-level visualization systems) ✔ --
e. g. for monitoring, diagnostics, maintenance and parameterization of individual circuit breakers
Utilization of the functionality of all CubicleBUS modules
e. g. configuration of the configurable digital output module, status check of the digital input modules, ✔ ✔
diagnostics
Transmittable circuit breaker data without integrated measurement function
Device identification
Communication address, Order No., circuit breaker in delivery status, circuit breaker parameters ✔ ✔
(size, number of poles, rated current module etc.), identification numbers, release type,
1)
Free text for plant code and comments -- ✔
Operating statuses
On/off status message, storage spring, tripped, readiness ✔ ✔
Switching position (connected, test and disconnected position, removed) for withdrawable circuit breakers, --1) ✔
15
PROFIBUS/MODBUS write protection on/off, free user input --1) ✔

Control commands
Switch circuit breaker on/off, switch free user output on/off --1) ✔
Reset tripped signal ✔ ✔
Delete event and history memory --1) ✔
Reset the min./max. measured values, reset the maintenance information ✔ ✔
History
Read out the event protocol, read out the release protocol --1) ✔
Maintenance information
Number of tripping operations L, S/I and in total, contact wear ✔ ✔
Number of operating cycles under load and in total, number of operating hours --1) ✔
Event signals
Tripped signal with details of the tripping current ✔ ✔
Alarm signals (e. g. overload) with incoming/outgoing information --1) ✔
All of the named event signals with time stamp --1) ✔
Parameterization of the protection functions
Reading out of the protection function parameters ✔ ✔
Settings for the protection function parameters can be changed by means of communication ✔ 2) ✔ 2)
Parameter set switchover possible (set A to set B and back) ✔ 2) ✔ 2)
Measured values
Phase currents, each with min./max. value ✔ ✔
Temperature in the circuit breaker with min./max. value --1) ✔
Temperature in the control cabinet with min./max. value --1) ✔
All of the named measured values with time stamp --1) ✔
Plus
Order code F01+ ... or F02+ ... F05
Additional transmittable circuit breaker data with integrated measurement function
Additional event signals
Threshold value alarms (e. g. over/underfrequency, over/undervoltage) ✔
Parameterization of the extended protection functions and setpoints (threshold values)
Reading out the parameters of the extended protection functions ✔
Settings for the extended protection function parameters can be changed ✔
Reading out and adjusting threshold values ✔
Additional measured values
Voltages, power, energy, power factor, frequency, each with min./max. value ✔
Harmonic analysis ✔
Recording of currents and voltages for configurable events in the curve form memory ✔
1) Data only available in conjunction with the COM15 module (BUS connec- ✔ Available
tion not required). -- Not available
2) Only possible with ETU76B.
15/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
CubicleBUS modules
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch
6 items of binary information concerning the state of the circuit
breaker (reasons for tripping and warnings) can be output via
this module to external signaling devices (e. g. LED, horn) or be
used for the selective shut-down of other system components
(e. g. frequency converters).
Digital output modules are available in versions with and without
a rotary coding switch. On modules with a rotary coding switch
it is possible to choose between two signaling blocks each with
6 defined assignments and to set an additional response delay. Analog output module
All the digital output modules are available as a version with re- Digital input modules
lay outputs (CO contacts, up to 12 A). Up to two modules of this With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals
type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL. (24 V DC) in the circuit breaker environment can be connected
to the system. It is thus possible for example to send messages
concerning the state of a switch disconnector or a control cabi-
net door to the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS.
With the digital input module on the CubicleBUS it is also possi-
ble for the two different protection parameter sets held in the
ETU76B solid-state releases to be switched over automatically in
a few milliseconds. It is thus possible, for example, to automati-
cally change the parameters of a coupling switch should the
transformer infeed fail.
One module each of this type can be used for holding the six
items of digital information and for automatically switching over
Digital output module with rotary coding switch the parameters.
15
Digital output modules, configurable
The configurable output module is available for higher-perfor-
mance solutions. With this module, random events on the
CubicleBUS can be switched directly to one of six available out-
puts or three of these outputs can be assigned with up to six
events. In other words, up to six events can be placed on one
physical output with OR operation. Either BDA/BDA Plus or
Switch ES Power is used for configuring.
A relay variant is also available here the same as for the output
modules with rotary coding switch. Only one module of this type
is possible per SENTRON 3WL.
ZSI modules (short-time grading control)
The use of ZSI modules is recommended when Siemens circuit
breakers are arranged in several staggered levels but full grad-
ing with the smallest possible delay is to be assured nevertheless.
The circuit breakers are interconnected by these modules. In
case of a short-circuit, each affected circuit breaker asks the cir-
cuit breakers directly downstream whether the short-circuit has
also occurred in the next, lower level. The short-circuit is exactly
localized as the result, and only the next upstream circuit
breaker in the energy flow direction is switched off.
Digital output module, configurable
Analog output modules
The analog output module can be used to output the following
measured values to analog indicators in the control cabinet
door:
• IL1, IL2, IL3, IN or
• UL12, UL23, UL31, UL1N or
• PL1, PL2, PL3, Stot or
• p.f.1 , p.f.2 , p.f.3, I % or
• favg, ULLavg, Ptot, p.f.avg
Four 4-20-mA/0-10-V interfaces are available for this. The mea-
sured values to be output are selected with a rotary coding ZSI module (short-time grading control)
switch. By using the analog output module it is possible to do
without additional converters and their conventional installa-
tion/wiring in the main current path. Up to two modules of this
type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/23

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
■ Technical specifications
Size I II III
N S N S H H C C
3-pole 4-pole
up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
4)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 154 1544)
15

0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65
Up to 500 V AC kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
1)
Size II with In max 2500 A.
Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N 2)
Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.
N
(Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V) 3)
At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S
S 4)
Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.
H
C
at 500 V)
DC Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical

specifications by orange-colored backgrounds.
15/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Size I II
Type ... 3WL11 10 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20
Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 Hz
Main conductor A ... 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
N conductor (only on 4-pole versions) A ... 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz V AC ... 690 ... 690 ... 690 ... ... ... ... ...
(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options") 690/1000 690/1000 690/1000 690/1000 690/1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
• Main current paths kV 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
• Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
• Control circuits kV 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Utilization categories B
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4) °C –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70
• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be °C –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70
observed)
Permissible load • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare) A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
At rear horizontal main circuit • Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5) A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
connections • Up to 70 °C (Cu black A 1000 1210 1490 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
5)
painted)
Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power loss at In
With 3-phase symmetrical load
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers W 100 105 150 40 45 80 85 180
• Withdrawable circuit breakers W 195 205 350 85 95 165 175 320
Operating times
• Make-time ms 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
• Opening time ms 38 38 38 34 34 34 34 34
2)
• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid) ms 80 80 80 100 100 100 100 100
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release) ms 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73
15
• Electrical opening time (instant. undervoltage release) ms 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73
• Opening time due to ETU, instant. short-circuit release ms 501) 501) 501) 501) 501) 501) 501) 501)
Endurance
• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000
• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles 20 000 20 000 20 000 15 000 15 000 15 000 15 000 15 000
• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 10 000 10 000 10 000 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500
• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles -- -- -- 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
• 1150 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles -- -- -- 500 500 500 500 500
• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles 20 000 20 000 20 000 15 000 15 000 15 000 15 000 15 000
Switching frequency
• 690 V version 1/h 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
• 1000 V version 1/h -- -- -- 20 20 20 20 20
• 1150 V version 1/h -- -- -- 20 20 20 20 20
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only
with autom. mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
Mounting position 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 °
h m a x .
= 1 m m
and/
or
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 2 7 a
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Main conductor • Copper bars, Units 1× 2× 2× 1× 1× 2× 2× 3×
minimum bare mm2 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10
cross-sections • Copper bars, Units 1× 2× 2× 1× 1× 2× 2× 3×
painted black mm2 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10 60 × 10 40 × 10 50 × 10 50 × 10
Auxiliary conductors (Cu) Standard connection =
Max. number of strain-relief clamp
auxiliary conductors × • Without end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
cross-section (solid/stranded) • With end sleeve acc. to 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
DIN 46228 Part 2
• With twin end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Optional connection =
tension spring
• Without end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
• With end sleeve acc. to 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
DIN 46228 Part 2
Position indicator switches Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Weights 3-pole • Fixed-mounted circuit kg 43 43 43 56 56 56 56 56
breakers
• Withdrawable circuit kg 45 45 45 60 60 60 60 60
4-pole breakers
• Guide frames kg 25 25 25 31 31 31 31 31
• Fixed-mounted circuit kg 50 50 50 67 67 67 67 67
breakers
• Withdrawable circuit kg 54 54 54 72 72 72 72 72
breakers
• Guide frames kg 30 30 30 37 37 37 37 37
1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with 3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see
ETU15B = 85 ms. Operating Manual).
2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes 4) Use of releases from –20 °C.
(short-time excited) 50 ms. 5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/25

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 Hz
Main conductor A 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
N conductor (only on 4-pole versions) A 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz V AC ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000
(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
• Main current paths kV 12 12 12 12 12 12
• Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 4 4 4
• Control circuits kV 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Utilization categories B (except switching capacity class DC)
• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4) °C –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70 –25/+70
• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed) °C –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70
Permissible load6) • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare) A 2500 3200 3950 4000 5000 5920
• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5) A 2500 3020 3810 4000 5000 5810
• Up to 70 °C (Cu black painted)5) A 2280 2870 3600 4000 5000 5500
Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power loss at In
With 3-phase symmetrical load
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers W 270 410 750 520 630 900
• Withdrawable circuit breakers W 520 710 925 810 1050 1600
Operating times
• Make-time ms 35 35 35 35 35 35
• Opening time ms 34 34 34 34 34 34
• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)2) ms 100 100 100 100 100 100
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release) ms 73 73 73 73 73 73
• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release) ms 73 73 73 73 73 73
15
• Opening time due to ETU, instantaneous short-circuit release ms 501) 501) 501) 50 50 50
Endurance
• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 10000 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000
• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles 15000 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000
• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 7500 4000 4000 2000 2000 2000
• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
• 1150 V version, electrical7) (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000
• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles 15000 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000
Switching frequency
• 690 V version 1/h 60 60 60 60 60 60
• 1000 V version 1/h 20 20 20 20 20 20
• 1150 V version7) 1/h 20 20 20 20 20 20
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state ms 80 80 80 80 80 80
release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only
with automatical mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 °
h m a x .
Mounting position
= 1 m m
and/
or
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 2 7 a
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Main conductor • Copper bars, Units 2× 3× 4× 4x 6x 6x
minimum bare mm2 100 × 10 100 × 10 120 × 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
cross-sections • Copper bars, Units 2× 3× 4× 4× 6× 6×
painted black mm2 100 × 10 100 × 10 100 × 108) 100 × 10 100 × 10 120 × 10
Auxiliary conductors Standard connection = strain-relief clamp
(Cu) • Without end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Max. number of • With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
auxiliary conductors × • With twin end sleeve
cross-section 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
(solid/stranded)
Optional connection = tension spring
• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Position indicator Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
switches
Weights 3-pole • Fixed-mounted circuit breakers kg 59 64 85 82 82 90
• Withdrawable circuit breakers kg 63 68 121 88 88 96
• Guide frames kg 39 45 52 60 60 70
4-pole • Fixed-mounted circuit breakers kg 71 77 103 99 99 108
• Withdrawable circuit breakers kg 76 82 146 106 106 108
• Guide frames kg 47 54 62 84 84 119
1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with 4) Use of releases from –20 °C.
ETU15B = 85 ms. 5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.
2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes 6) 4000 A, size II in fixed-mounted version, 3-pole.
(short-time excited) 50 ms. 7) Size III: data for very high switching capacity.
3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see 8) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit
Operating Manual). breakers: 4 x 120 x 10 mm.
15/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Closing/ Max. force required to operate the hand lever N 230
Charging stored- Required number of strokes on the hand lever 9
energy feature
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Charging stored-
energy feature
Closing solenoid • Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
(CC)
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC 0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
• Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
• Minimum command duration at Us for the closing solenoid ms 60
• Short-circuit protection 1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Manual operating For data see above.
mechanism
Motor • Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC 0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
• Power consumption of motor AC/DC VA/W 135/135
15
• Time required to charge the stored-energy mechanism at 1 × Us s 10
Closing solenoid For data see above.
For motor and • Short-circuit protection 2 A TDz (slow)/1 A
closing solenoid Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic;
Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages
• Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/ At Us = 24 ... 30 V 2A
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (for different At Us = 48 ... 60 V 2A
rated control supply voltages) At Us = 110 ... 125 V DC/ 1A
110 ... 127 V AC
At Us = 220 ... 250 V DC/ 1A
208 ... 240 V AC
Solid-state release signals
Measuring accuracy of the solid-state release Protection functions according to
EN 60947;
current indication 10 %;
base quantities 1 %;
derived quantities 4 %
Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage • Response values Pickup 0.85 × Us
releases (circuit breaker can be closed)
UVR (F3) and Dropout 0.35 ... 0.7× Us
UVR-td (F4) (circuit breaker is tripped)
• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 30 V DC, 0.85 ... 1.26
48 V DC, 110 V DC,
220 V DC
• Rated control supply voltage Us Instantaneous
AC 50/60 Hz V 110 ... 127/208 ... 240/380 ... 415
DC V 24/30/48/60/110/220 ... 2501)
Delayed
AC 50/60 Hz V 110 ... 127; 208 ... 240; 380 ... 415
DC V 48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
• Power consumption (pickup/uninterrupted duty) AC VA 20/5
DC W 20/5
• Opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 0 ms 200
- Version UVR (F3)
Instantaneous ms 80
With delay ms 200
- Version UVR-td (F8)
With delay, td = 0.2 to 3.2 s s 0.2 ... 3.2
Reset through additional NC contact – direct switching off ms 100
• Short-circuit protection 1 A TDz (slow) 1 A
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1)
24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR (F3).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/27

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Auxiliary releases
Shunt release (ST) • For continuous command - Response value pickup > 0.7 × Us
(F1, F2) (100 % ON period), locks (circuit breaker is tripped)
out on momentary-con- - Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
tact commands
- Extended operating range At 24 V DC, 48 V DC 0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
for battery operation 60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 Hz V 110; 230
DC V 24; 30; 48; 60; 110; 220
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
- Minimum command duration at Us ms 60
- opening time of circuit breaker at AC/DC ms 80
Us = 100 %
- Short-circuit protection 1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational
class)/ miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
5 % ON period - Response value Pickup > 0.7 × Us
(circuit breaker is tripped)
- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
- Extended operating range At 24 V DC, 48 V DC 0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
for battery operation 60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 Hz V 110 ... 127; 208 ... 240
DC V 24; 48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
- Minimum command duration at Us ms 25
15
- Opening time of circuit breaker at AC/DC ms 50

Us = 100 %
- Short-circuit protection 1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational
class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
• With stored energy - Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 Hz V 110; 230
feature consisting of DC V 110; 220
shunt release and capac- - Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
itor storage device
- Storage time at Us/ maximum 5 min/minimum 5 s
recharging time at Us
- Opening time of circuit breaker, As with "for continuous
short-circuit protection command"
Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indicator (F7)
Remote reset solenoid for - Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
mechanical tripped indica- - Extended operating range At 24 V DC, 48 V DC 0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
tor (F7) for battery operation 110 V DC
220 V DC
- Minimum command duration at Us for the remote ms 60
reset solenoid
- Short-circuit protection
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/ 2 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 24 V DC
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic and 48 V DC,
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 110 V and
208 ... 250 V
Contact position-driven auxiliary switches (S1, S2, S3, S4, S7, S8)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC/DC 500
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC/DC 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4
Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 ... 230 380/400 500
50/60 Hz - Rated operational current
Ie /AC-12 A 10 10 10
Ie/AC-15 A 4 3 2
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 48 110 220
- Rated operational current
Ie/DC-12 A 10 8 3.5 1
Ie/DC-13 A 8 4 1.2 0.4
Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 10 A TDz, 10 A Dz
• Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 10 A
15/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Ready-to-close signaling switch (S20) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)
Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 250
- Rated operational current Ie A 8
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 125 250
- Rated operational current Ie A 0.4 0.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 2 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch (S24) and signal switch for auxiliary releases (S22, S23) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)
Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 250
- Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 A 8
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 125 250
- Rated operational current Ie/DC-12 A 6 0.4 0.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 6 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch Signal duration after tripping Until manual or electrical
remote reset (option)
Position indicator switch on guide frame
Type of contact • Signal: - "Circuit breaker in connected 3 CO 1 CO
position" 2 CO or 1 CO
- "Circuit breaker in test position" 1 CO 1 CO
- "Circuit breaker in disconnected
position"
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 50/60 Hz V 440
DC V 250
Rated operational voltage Ue V 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4
Switching capacity • Rated operational - Ie/AC-12 24 V 10 A, 110/127 V 10 A,
current Ie 220/240 V 10 A, 320/440 V 10 A
15
- Ie/AC-15 220/240 V 4 A,
320/440 V 3 A,
- Ie/DC-12 24 V 10 A, 48 V 2.5 A,
220/240 V 0.2 A,
- Ie/DC-13 24 V 3.0 A, 220/240 V 0.1 A
- A 300 (AC) 120 V 6 A, 240 V 3 A
- R 300 (DC) 125 V 0.22 A, 250 V 0.11 A

Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 8 A TDz (slow)
• Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 8 A TDz (slow)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/29

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Protection functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B

Parameterization by D D D&S
Functional overview of the solid-state release system
Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --
Setting range IR = In × ... 0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7- 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6- 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-
0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-1 0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1 0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
R
L Switchable overload protection
(I2t- or I4t-dependent function)
-- -- --
Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixed

Setting range for time-lag class tR at I4t -- -- --
R
Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --
Phase failure sensitivity -- at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M)
Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓
N Function can be switched on/off
N conductor setting range IN = In × ...
--
--
--
--
✓
1
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection -- ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --
s d
Setting range Isd = In × ... -- 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12
S s d
Setting range for delay time tsd
Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection
--
--
0-M-100-200-300-400 ms
--
0-M-100-200-300-400 ms
--
(I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay time tsd at I2t -- -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking function -- -- --
i Instantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓ ✓
I
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 8 8 b Function can be switched on/off
Setting range Ii = In × ...
--
2-3-4-5-6-7-8
--
Fixed for Ii 20 × In, max. 50 kA
--
Fixed for Ii 20 × In, max. 50 kA
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ Fixed mounted
Tripping and alarm function -- -- --
Tripping function can be switched on/off -- -- ✓
Alarm function can be switched on/off -- -- --
Detection of the ground-fault current through summation -- -- ✓
g current formation with internal or external neutral con-
ductor transformer
15
g
G Detection of ground-fault current through external
current transformer
-- -- --
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release -- -- A-B-C-D-E

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 8 9 a Setting range of the operating current Ig for alarm -- -- --
Setting range of the delay time tg -- -- 100-200-300-400-500 ms
Switchable ground-fault protection characteristic -- -- --
curve (I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay time tg at I2t -- -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. func. -- -- --
Parameter set switchover
Switchable between parameter set A and B -- -- --
LCD
Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) -- -- --
Graphical LCD (24 V, ext. power supply required) -- -- --
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated -- -- --
Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Measurement-function capable with measurement -- -- --
function Plus
LED display
Solid-state release active ✓ ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓ ✓
L-release -- ✓ ✓
S-release -- ✓ ✓
I-release -- ✓ ✓
N-release -- -- ✓
NSE00890
G-release -- -- ✓
G-alarm -- -- --
Release through extended protection function -- -- --
Communication -- -- --
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)
Overload warning -- -- --
Load shedding, load receiving -- -- --
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms -- -- --
Temperature alarm -- -- --
Phase unbalance -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit release -- -- --
Short-time delayed short-circuit release -- -- --
Overload trip -- -- --
Neutral conductor release -- -- --
NSE00891
Ground-fault protection release -- -- --
Ground-fault alarm -- -- --
Auxiliary relay -- -- --
ETU fault -- -- --
Delay time figures given in ms. ✓ Available For the setting range of the operating current Ig see page 15/31.
M = Motor protection, corresponds to 20 ms. -- Not available
D = Rotary coding switch ❑ Optional
D & S = Rotary coding and slide switch
K = Communication
M/K = Menu/communication
15/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
Protection functions ETU45B ETU76B

Parameterization by D& S M/K
Functional overview of the solid-state release system
Overload protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- ✓
Setting range IR = In × ... 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6- 0.4 ... 1
0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
Switchable overload protection ✓ ✓
(I2t- or I4t-dependent function)
Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 2-3.5-5.5-8-10-14-17-21-25-30 s 2 ... 30 s
Setting range for time-lag class tR at I4t 1-2-3-4-5 s 1 ... 5 s
Thermal image can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Phase failure sensitivity At tsd = 20 ms (M) ✓ (on/off)
Neutral conductor protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
N conductor setting range IN = In × ... 0.5 ... 1 0.2 ... 2
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
Setting range Isd = In × ... 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25 × In ... 0.8 × Icw
Setting range for delay time tsd M-100-200-300-400 ms M-80 ... 4000 ms
Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
2
(I t-dependent function)
2
Setting range for delay time tsd at I t 100-200-300-400 ms 100 ... 400 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-Modul
Instantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
Setting range Ii = In × ... 1.5-2.2-3-4-6-8-10-12-0.8 x Ics 1.5 × In ... 0.8 × Ics
Ground-fault protection ❑ Module can be retrofitted ❑ Module can be retrofitted
Tripping and alarm function ✓ ✓
Tripping function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Alarm function can be switched on/off -- ✓
Detection of the ground-fault current through summation cur- ✓ ✓
rent formation with int. or ext. neutral conductor transformer
Detection of ground-fault current through external ✓ ✓
15
current transformer
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release A-B-C-D-E A ... E
Setting range of the operating current Ig for alarm A-B-C-D-E A ... E
Setting range of the delay time tg 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 ms
Switchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve ✓ ✓
(I2t-dependent function)
2
Setting range for delay time tg at I t 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-Modul
Parameter set switchover
Switchable between parameter set A and B -- ✓
LCD
Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) ❑ --
Graphical LCD (24 V, external power supply required) -- ✓
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated ✓ ✓
Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP ✓ ✓
Measurement-function capable with measurement function ✓ ✓
Plus
LED display
Solid-state release active ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓
L-release ✓ ✓
S-release ✓ ✓
I-release ✓ ✓
N-release ✓ ✓
G-release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)
G-alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Release through extended protection functions ✓ ✓
Communication ✓ ✓
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)
Overload warning ✓ ✓
Load shedding, load receiving ✓ ✓
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms ✓ ✓
Temperature alarm ✓ ✓
Phase unbalance ✓ ✓
Instantaneous short-circuit release ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed short-circuit release ✓ ✓
Overload trip ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor release ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Ground-fault alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Auxiliary relay ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓
Setting range of the operating current Ig Increment size for adjustment of M For continuation of legend
Size I and size II Size III From ... to Increment From ... to Increment see page 15/30.
size size
A 100 A 400 A 0 ... 1 0.1 1000 ... 1600 50
B 300 A 600 A 1 ... 100 1 1600 ... 10000 100
C 600 A 800 A 100 ... 500 5 10000 ... max 1000
D 900 A 1000 A 500 ... 1000 10
E 1200 A 1200 A
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/31

© Siemens AG 2009

■ Characteristic curves
Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own 10000
NSE0_01527
characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following.
R min R max
The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest
[s]
setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A 1000 0,5 ... 1,0 x n
rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-
Opening time
der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant 100
parts of the characteristics have to be combined.
The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re- 10
lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-
fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-
mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore 1 i min i max
not yet enabled, the opening time is extended, depending on the 2 ... 8 x n
level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the 0,1
break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must
be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)
0,01
Refer to the following legend for tolerances. 0,1 1 10 100
The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures / n
at the circuit breaker between –5 and +55 °C. The release can
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU15B solid-state release
be operated at ambient temperatures of –20 to +70 °C. An ex-
tended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.
10000 10000
NSE0_01519
NSE0_01520
R min R max R min R max

Opening time [s]
Opening time [s]
1000 0,4 ... 1,0 x n 1000 0,4 ... 1,0 x n

N
100 100
15
10 10
sd min sd max sd min sd max

1 1
1,25 ... 12 x n 1,25 ... 12 x n sd max
sd max
0 ... 0,4 s sd min 0 ... 0,4 s sd min
0,1 0,1
i i > 20 x n i i > 20 x n
max. 50 kA max. 50 kA
0,01 0,01
0,1 1 10 100 0,1 1 10 100
/ n / n
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU25B solid-state release, SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release,
LSI characteristic curve LSIN characteristic curve
10000 10000
NSE0_01521
NSE0_01523
Opening time [s]
[s]
1000 1000 sd
Opening time
1,25 ... 12 x n
100 100
2
sd = const
g min g max
10 10
100 ... 1200 A1)

1 1 2
sd = const
g max
0,1 ... 0,5 s sd = const 0,1 ... 0,4 s
0,1 g min 0,1
0,02 ... 0,4 s
0,01 0,01
100 1000 10000 100000 0,1 1 10 100
A / n
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release, SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B solid-state release,
G characteristic curve S characteristic curve
1)
Tolerances for the set currents Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A
L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 x IR Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.
S: –0 %, +20 % 2) With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response
I: –0 %, +20 % times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the
G: –0 %, +20 % tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
Tolerances for the tripping times
L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curve
S: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
I: < 50 ms
G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
15/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own 10000
NSE0_01525a
characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following.
The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest
Opening time [s]

setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A 1000
rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-
der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant 100
parts of the characteristics have to be combined. g
2 = const
The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-
10
lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be- 100 ... 1200 A1)
fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-
mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore 1
not yet enabled, the opening ime is extended, depending on the 0,1 ... 0,5 s
g
level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the 0,1
break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must
be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)
0,01
Refer to the following table for tolerances. 100 1000 10000 100000
The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures A
at the circuit breaker between -5 and +55 °C. The release can be
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state
operated at ambient temperatures of -20 to +70 °C (ETU76B release, G characteristic curve
with graphics display up to +55 °C). An extended tolerance
band can apply at these temperatures. 10000
NSE0_01526a
10000
NSE0_01522a
Opening time [s]

4 = const
R 1000
sd
Opening time [s]
1000 0,4 ... 1,0 x n

1,25 x n ... 0,8 x cw
100
2 = const
100
10
15
R
10
2 ... 30s for 2 2
1 ... 5s for 4 1 sd = const
sd = const
1 0,1 ... 0,4 s
0,1 0,02 ... 4 s
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 1
0,01 / n / cw
0,1 1 10 100
/ n SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU76B solid-state release,
S characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state
release, L characteristic curve
Further characteristic curves are shown in the manual and the
10000
planning and configuring tool SIMARIS deSign, or ask your
NSE0_01524a
Siemens contact person.

Opening time [s]
1000
Tolerances for the set currents
L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 × IR
100 S: –0 %, +20 %
I: –0 %, +20 %
G: –0 %, +20 %
10
Tolerances for the tripping times
L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curve
1 S: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
i I: < 50 ms
G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
0,1 1,5 x n ... 0,8 x cs
1)
Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A
0,01 Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.
0,1 1 10 1
2)
/ n / cs With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response
times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
release, I characteristic curve
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/33

© Siemens AG 2009

■ Dimensional drawings
Voltage transformer for SENTRON 3WL External current transformers for N conductor without copper
277
connection pieces
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0
6 0
1 6
125
8
R 1 3 ,1
8 ,9
NSE0_01103a
N S E 0 _ 0 1 3 7 5
99
9 6 ,8
2 2
8 1
For mounting on R 2 2
35 mm standard
4 0
mounting rail
1 8 5 1
Current transformers for overload protection in the 3 6
7 0
N conductor 8 3
External current transformers for N conductor with copper
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0
connection pieces
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0
1 5 4 1 R 2 7
Ø 1 3 ,5
1 1 5
1 3 1
5 4
N S E 0 _ 0 1 3 7 6
6 5 ,5
4 4
2 4
8 8 5 1
1 7 0
1 3 0
6 8
9 1
5 1
9 5
1 1 3 3
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 0 6 b
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0

5 5 9 7
15
8 3 1 6 1
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0 R 1 5
1 0 7
1 2 3
N S E 0 _ 0 1 3 7 7
4 5
3 0 3 0 3 × 1 0
5 0 ,5
3 1
3
Ø 1 3 ,5
1 6 0 5 1
1 8 4
4 4
2 4
Door cut-out for operator panel

1 3 0
1 7 0
9 1
6 8
5 1
Door cut-out with edge protector

2 9 5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 0 7 b
Inner dimensions with mounted

edge protector
9 0 1 3 1
1 1 3
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0
3 4 0
3 0 3 0 3 0 3 × 1 0 5 2
Ø 1 3 ,5
2 4 0
4 4
2 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 c
1 3 0
9 1
6 8
1 7 0
5 1
Door cut-out for operator panel using the door sealing frame
Option with/without door interlocking
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 0 8 b
1 6 0 1 2 3 3 1 4
1 8 4 3 0 0
1 2 0 4 0
Ø 5 ,5 3 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 1 0 c
R 5 R 5
1 8 5
1 4 0
2 )
Ø 5 ,5
3 5 0
1 4 0
1 8 0
1 7 5
4 0 1 2 0
■ Dimensions for option with door interlocking Ø 5 ,5

6 5
1) Mounting surface
2) Center SENTRON 3WL operator panel
1 2
1 1 ,5
3) 8 mounting holes for door sealing frame 1 ) 2 1 4 )

4 0
4) 3 mounting holes for door interlocking
15/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

CubicleBUS module Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
3WL9 111-0AT2.-0AA0 3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0
70 86 3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0
81,9 38
45,5 19
47,5
94
16(B
153
16(B
30
15
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/35

© Siemens AG 2009

Door cut-out for operator panel using protective cover IP55
Protective cover, IP55
400
NSE0_01029c
395
NSE0_01030b
4 x R5
4 x 5,5
340-350 85
72
295-300
72
435
68
70
Switch mounting level

341
Mounting surface for switch or Circuit-breaker
guide frame 313 mounting level 148
17
Safety clearances from grounded parts Safety clearances from live parts
Rated operational voltage Above Lateral Rear Rated operational voltage Above Lateral Rear
auxiliary connector (each side) auxiliary connector (each side)
V/AC mm mm mm V/AC mm mm mm
Size I, fixed-mounted version Size I, fixed-mounted version
500 751) 0 0 500 150 20 20
690 751) 0 0 690 300 50 125
15
Size I, withdrawable version, Size I, withdrawable version,

without arc chute cover without arc chute cover
500 501) 0 0 500 150 20 14
1)
690 50 0 0 690 300 50 14
Size I, withdrawable version, Size I, withdrawable version,
with arc chute cover with arc chute cover
500 0 02) 0 500 14 100 14
2)
690 0 0 0 690 14 100 14
Size II, fixed-mounted version Size II, fixed-mounted version
500 751) 0 0 500 250 50 20
690 751) 0 0 690 600 100 140
1000 180 0 0 1000 430 100 125
Size II, withdrawable version, Size II, withdrawable version,
500 501) 0 0 500 250 50 14
1)
690 50 0 0 690 600 100 30
1000 100 0 0 1000 350 100 14
Size II, withdrawable version, Size II, withdrawable version,
500 0 02) 0 500 14 50 14
690 0 02) 0 690 14 225 14
Size III, fixed-mounted version Size III, fixed-mounted version
500 751) 0 0 500 75 20 20
690 751) 0 0 690 500 100 125
1000 180 0 0 1000 430 100 125
Size III, withdrawable version, Size III, withdrawable version,
500 501) 0 0 500 50 20 14
690 501) 0 0 690 500 100 14
1000 100 0 0 1000 350 100 14
Size III, withdrawable version, Size III, withdrawable version,
500 0 02) 0 500 14 50 14
2)
690 0 0 0 690 14 200 14
DC non-automatic air circuit breakers 1) Value for plate; 0 mm for struts and grids.
300 45 0 0 2)
600 200 0 0 40 mm (size II: 70 mm) for plates which cover the lateral openings in the
1000 150 0 0 guide frame.
All safety clearances above the circuit breaker refer to the upper
edge of the auxiliary connector - not to the upper edge of the arc
chute! See dimensional drawings on pages 15/37 to 15/45, parts
4) and 5).
15/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Size I, up to 1600 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
Standard version Optional connection variants
Horizontal connection Front connection (single)
55 55 55 55
35
NSE0_00611a
4) 5) 4 7
Æ 13,5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 1 2 c
275
440,5
437,5
3)
NSE00613b
421
11)
e
6
123,5
270 15
35
300 10 60 90 90 90
26
390 c 8 2
d
Front connection (double hole)
according to DIN 43673
Ø 13,5
1) 2) 14) 9) 4 7 55 55 55 55
40
60,5
8)
80
33,5 N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 1 5 c
3)
a
NSE00616b
421
541,5
11)
327,5
461,5
516
3)
g
6
a
275
150
80
5,5
f
76
15
40
NSE0_00614e 45 6) 14 60 90 90 90
c 8 2
150 106
210
230 127
Vertical connection
90 90 90 60 1 1 ) 3 5 NSE00619 b
35
55
Ø 13,5
11)
6 0
7) 3)
3 0
3)
7)
2 6 7 ,5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 1 8 c
ØM8
1 2 7 ,5
1 1 3 ,5
NSE00617a
139 58 1 3 ,5
320 1 2 8 ,5 60 90 90 90
410
NSE00620
3)
60 90 90 90
——— 4-pole version 9) Key operation.
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes. 11) Terminal face.
2) Arc quenching space. 14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the
system. Rated a b c d e f g
circuit breaker
4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals. current
5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection. A
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door. Up to 1000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system. 1250 ... 1600 15 15 15 6 461 39 551
8) "Secure OFF" locking device.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see
page 15/36.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/37

© Siemens AG 2009

Size I, up to 1600 A, 3- and 4-pole, withdrawable version
320 62,5 3 5 0
270 2 6 0
NSE00622a
4) 5) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
NSE0_00621a
1 3 ,5
3 5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 2 3 b
6
275
468,5
403
465,5
1 1 )
3 7 3
3 )
2 8 7
123,5
6 9
13 30 c
11
10) 169,5
210 55
300 1 5 9 0 9 0 9 0
3 5
2 6
382,5 Front connection (double hole)
367,5 according to DIN 43673 3 5 0
NSE0_00624c 327 2) 2 6 0
62,5 1 3 ,5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
7) 8)
NSE00625a
9)
4 0
8 0
9
a
519
327,5
3)
460
6
493
a
1 1 )
3 7 3
2 8 7
275
31
15
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 2 6 b
150
Ø14
76
10)
34
40
6 9
27 220 45 6)
8 0
4 0
42 58
88,5 c 169,5
1 4
121,5 1 5 9 0 9 0 9 0
140,5
Vertical connection
3 5 0
38
55 55 55 55 2 6 0
11) b
38
Ø 13,5 Ø 13,5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 2 9 a
60
11)
30
NSE00627a
267,5
2 8 7
3 )
127,5
139 68
270 25 NSE00628a 150
320
165
6 9
410
1 5 9 0 9 0 9 0
350 ——— 4-pole version
260 2) For guide frame without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded or
non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.
5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
3) 6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.
7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.
287
8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.

9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes 10 mm.
NSE0_00630a
11) Terminal face.

69
10) 15 10)
55
90 90 90
Rated circuit breaker current a b c

A
Up to 1000 10 10 10
1250 ... 1600 15 15 15
page 15/36.
For flange connections see following page.
15/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Size I, up to 1600 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
Flange connection
3 5 0
2 6 0
14 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 3 2 a
NSE00631
M 1 2
3 3
5 9
2 8 7
2 6
3 )
2 8 2 ,5
5 9
1 4 2 ,5
6 9
121
1 5 9 0 9 0 9 0

system.
page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
15
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/39

© Siemens AG 2009

Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
4 7 90 90 90 90
35
NSE0_00633a
4) 5) 40 40
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 3 4 d
275
NSE00635c
437,5
440,5 6
421
11)
e
3)
35
123,5
85 10
270 90 130 130 130 13,5
26
440
c 8 2
d
570
13) 1) 2) Front connection (double hole)

90 90 90 90
12)
40
4 7 40 40
14)
80
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 3 7 d
a
621
3)
NSE00638c
541,5
421
516
327,5
3) 11)
451,5
461,5
6
g
275
14
5,5
150
80
a
76
90 130 130 130

15
13,5
40
NSE0_00636e 45
150 6)
210 106 c 8 2
230 127
Vertical connection, up to 3200 A

Ø 13,5
130 130 130 90 b

35
90 NSE00641
30
30 30
30
11)
Ø13,5 3) 3)
7) 7)
290
98
Ø9
134,5
35
NSE0_00639f
139 128 NSE00640b

460 90 130 130 130
113,5
590 11)
128,5
NSE00642
——— 4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.
2) Arc quenching space, " 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
3) surfaces.
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.
7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
11) Terminal face.
12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker.
90 130 130 130 13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
Rated circuit a b c d e f g
breaker
current
A
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
2500 15 15 20 6 461 39 551
3200/4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
page 15/36.
15/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Vertical connection 4000 A
1)
2)
30
85 Nm
541,5
461,5
30
345,5
Ø 13,5
79,5
NSE0_01868
100
10
4011)
20
142
200 130 200
162

2) Arc quenching space, " 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-
conductive surfaces.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
15
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/41

© Siemens AG 2009

Size II, up to 3200 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
5 3 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 4 5 c
4) 5) 62,5 4 0 0
NSE0_00643b 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0
NSE00644b
4 0 4 0
3 5
1 3 ,5
275
468,5 6
465,5
403
3 )
1 1 )
3 7 3
2 8 7
123,5
2 6
169,5
11
40
6 9
10) 270 10) 4 5 ,1
350 55 5 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
3 5
480
382,5 5 3 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 4 8 c
367,5 62,5 4 0 0
1 3 ,5
NSE0_00646f
327 13) 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0
NSE00647b
2) 4 0 4 0
4 0
12)
8 0
7) 8)
9)
6
493
9 3 )
620
1 1 )
3 7 3
2 8 7
a
518,5
520
327,5
3)
34
460
15
275
1 4
a
6 9
150
8 0
Ø14 169,5
10)
76
4 0 5 5 4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
31
40
27 220 45 6)
42 58
88,5
121,5
140,5
30 30 2) For guide frame 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
38
Ø 13,5 4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.

11) 5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
NSE00649a

139 138 10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.
270 95 11) Terminal face.
460
590 12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.
13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
530
400
90 90 90 90
NSE0_00652b
3)
287
69
10) 10)
55 45 130 130 130

Rated circuit breaker current a b c page 15/36.
A
For vertical connection and flange connection see following
Up to 2000 10 10 10
page.
2500 15 15 20
3200/4000 30 30 20
15/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Vertical connection,
up to 3200 A 5 3 0
4 0 0
11) b
NSE00650a
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 5 1 a
38
30
30
3 )
2 8 7
290
100
135
6 9
5 5 4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
157
172
Vertical connection 4000 A

30
100
30
315,5
NSE0_01869
109,5
4011) 4,6 10
20
177
197 55 45
15
200 130 200
Flange connection
5 3 0
NSE00653
4 0 0
M 1 2 9 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 5 4 a
4 0
3 3
2 6
5 9
3 )
2 8 7
2 8 2 ,5
5 9
1 4 2 ,5
6 9
121
4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0

system.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/43

© Siemens AG 2009

Size III, up to 6300 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
4) 5) 47 160 160 160 160
35
NSE0_00655a 50 50
13,5
NSE00656c
3)
NSE00657c
275
437,5
440,5
421
11)
451
26
123,5
130 210 210 210
35
270 205 12 20
11
680 82
890

13) 1) 4 7 Ø 1 3 ,5 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0
2) 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0
4 0
12)
8 0
14) N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 5 9 d
3 )
30
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 6 0 c
6
621
5 4 1
1 1 )
4 2 1
541,5
516
327,5
3)
451,5
461,5
275
1 4
3 4
8 0
5,5
150
30
15
2 1 0 2 1 0
76
2 0 1 3 0 2 1 0
4 0
NSE0_00658e 45 8 2
35 150 6)
210 106
230 127
Vertical connection
107 20
30
10 NSE00663
15
210 210 210

35
30 160 15 130
11)
11) 3)
Ø13,5 40
330,5
7) 3) 7)
120
M10
94,5
NSE0_00661e
85 210 210 210

139 248 40
NSE00662a
704 Ø 13,5
142
914
162
NSE00664a
3)
130 210 210 210 130
——— 4-pole version 13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes. non-conductive surfaces.
2) Arc quenching space, " 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or 14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
non-conductive surfaces. For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the page 15/36.
system.
11) Terminal face.
15/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
Horizontal connection up to 5000 A Front connection (single hole),
up to 4000 A 8 4 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 6 7 c
6 3 0
4) 5) 62,5 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0
1 3 ,5
NSE0_00665b
NSE00666b
5 0 5 0
3 5
275
465,5
468,5
6
403
1 1 )
2 8 7
3 7 3
123,5
10) 270 160

10) 10)
6 9
590
20
800 57 8 5 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0
11
169,5
3 5
5 9 0
2 6
5 7 8 0 0
382,5 according to DIN 43673 up to 8 4 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 7 0 c
367,5 4000 A 6 3 0
1 3 ,5
NSE0_00668d
327 13) 62,5 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0
5 0 5 0
4 0
2)
NSE00669b
12)
8 0
7) 8)
9)
9
6
30
493
1 1 )
2 8 7
3 7 3
620
518,5
520
327,5
3)
460
30
1 4
275
6 9
8 0
15
150
Ø14
10) 20 8 5 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0
76
4 0
34
169,5 5 9 0
5 7 8 0 0
31
40
27 220 45 6)
42 58
88,5
121,5
140,5
Vertical connection, up to 6300 A
30 8 4 0
38
NSE00672a
30 30 Ø 13,5 6 3 0
11) 7 0 4
2 0
1 0
30
38
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 7 3 b
11)
330,5
NSE00671a
124,5
2 8 7
94,5
139 260 24
270 217 177
6 9
704 Ø 13,5 197

914 a b b 2 1 0
5 7 5 9 0
8 0 0
9 1 4
840 2) For guide frame 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded
630 or non-conductive surfaces.
160 160 160 160
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for
NSE0_00674a
supporting phase barriers in the system.

287

10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.
69
11) Terminal face.

57 85 210 210 210
12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V guide frame.
surfaces.

Rated circuit breaker current a b page 15/36.
A
4000 40 210
5000 40 210
6300 5 245
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/45

© Siemens AG 2009

Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
Flange connection, up to 4000 A
8 4 0
NSE00675
6 3 0
7 0 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 7 6 a
1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0 1 6 0
1 2
3 3
M
5 9
2 8 7
2 6
2 8 2 ,5
5 9
1 4 2 ,5
6 9
3 0
121 5 7 8 5 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0
5 9 0
8 0 0
9 1 4

page 15/36.
15
15/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

■ Schematics
Terminal assignment diagram
optional Internal wiring Terminals External wiring

Accessories
(Auxiliary switch S1, S2 = Standard) L+
c
L–
e.g. current transformer in the

14 star point of power transformer
Remote reset bell alarm & tripped indicator F7 or a summation current
13 transformer 1200 A /1A
G transformer S2 12
G transformer S1 11
N sensor S2 10
Short terminals if no N-sensor
N sensor S1 9
ext. voltage transformer Com 8 L1
ext. voltage transformer L3 7 L2
ext. voltage transformer L2 6 L3
ext. voltage transformer L1 5 N
0 V DC 4
24 V DC input
24 V DC 3
BUS + 2 Termination resistor,
BUS 1 if not external CB-module!
Not available with communication connection "F02" or “F12”.
14
F1, 2
– + OUT
Trip signalling switch S24 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

/COM16
Open
(position after tripping) 12 (Option F02/F12)

Y1
COM15/COM16 module is at position "-X7".
15
11
Close
– +
"Spring charged" signal S21 10

Local electric close S10 9 L+ c
Free
– +
8
DPWrite Free
7
Enable
6
5
Signaling contact at the 1 st auxiliary release
External
Internal
IN
4
3
S23 2
Signaling contact at the 2nd auxiliary release
1
14 L+
1st auxiliary release F1 "ST" c
13 L–
12
S1 "NO"
11
10
S1 "NC"
9
Closing solenoid 8 L–
c
7 L+
6
5
"Ready to close" signal S20
4
S2 "NO"
3
2
S2 "NC"
1
F4 only "quick OFF" 14

EMERGENCY STOP
F4 only "quick OFF" 13 or short terminals
12 L+
2nd auxiliary release: F2 "ST", F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td" c
11 L–
10
S3 "NO" or S7 "NO"
9
8
S3 "NC" or S7 "NO"
7
6
S4 "NO" or S8 "NO"
5
4
S4 "NC" or S8 "NO"
NSE0_00605 o
3
(sw) (br)
Charging motor M 2 L+
c
opt. motor main switch S12 1 L–
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/47

© Siemens AG 2009

Example of an overall circuit diagram for SENTRON 3WL
(3WL1. ..–.....–4GN4–Z C11+ C22 + K07) with "UVR" undervoltage release (F3), with "ST" shunt release
(F1), with tripped signal switch (option K07), with auxiliary switch
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy fea- 4 NO + 4 NC.
ture with electrical ON button (option C11), with ready-to-close
signaling switch (optionl C22), with LSING solid-state release,
L1 L1
(L+) release (L+)
OFF
contact
ON
-X5.10
-X7.14
-X7.12
-X6.10
-X5.12
-X6.14
-X6.12
-X6.2
-X6.6
-X5.8
-X5.4
-X6.4
-X5.2
-X5.6
-X6.7
-X7.9
5
1
3
-A1 ETU
version L
-S10
S
electr. I
ON
N N
G
R
-S11 -F5
-S20
-S24
-Q1 -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4

QS P
-T1
M -F3 U<
-Y1 -T2
mech.
ON
-T3
NSE0_01558b
mech. -S12
15
-F1
OFF
-X5.9
6
2
4
-X6.1
-X5.7
-X5.3
-X6.9
-X6.13
-X6.3
-X5.5
-X6.11
-X7.13
-X5.11
-X8.9
-X5.1
-X8.10
-X6.8
-X6.5
N N
(L-) (L-)
* Short terminals, if no N sensor
Function diagram of -A1 Solid-state release ETU

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker -S1/-S2 1st auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)
-S3/-S4 2nd auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)
-S7 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S7 (2 NO) can be used
F1 if there is no S3 - S3 and S7 have
the same terminal assignment/mounting space
F2 -S8 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S8 (2 NO) can be used
if there is no S4 - S4 and S8 have
S20 F3 the same terminal assignment/mounting space
3WL1. ..-.....-...2 (2 NO + 2 NC) S1+S2

F4 3WL1. ..-.....-...4 (4 NO + 4 NC) S1+S2+S3+S4
M1 3WL1. ..-.....-...7 (6 NO+ 2 NC) S1+S2+S7+S8
3WL1. ..-.....-...8 (5 NO + 3 NC) S1+S2+S3+S8
Q1 S1 & S2
P
S3 & S4 -S10 Electrical ON button
-S11 Internal motor shutdown switch (if spring is tensioned)
1 -S12 Motor shutdown switch
F5 (no automatic tensioning of spring)
S24 -S20 Ready-to-close signaling switch
Y1 -S24 Tripped signal switch
2 A1 -F1 1st auxiliary release, shunt release

T1 -F3 2nd auxiliary release, undervoltage release
L -F5 Tripping solenoid
T2 S
-M Motor for "charging energy store"
T3 I -P Stored-energy mechanism
N N -QS Actuator lever for "stored-energy mechanism"
T4 G -Q1 Main contacts
-T1/-T2/-T3 Current transformers
3 -X5/-X6/-X7/-X8 Terminals
NSE0_01559c -Y1 Closing solenoid
-R Indicator and reset button for solid-state release
-X8.9/-X8.10 Connection option: external neutral conductor

transformer
15/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

Example of the mode of operation of Zone Selective
Interlocking functionality in power distribution
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL

3 3 3
module
module
module
4 4 4
ZSI
ZSI
ZSI
5 5 5
6 6 6 SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
3 3
module
module
5
6
1
2
3
4
4 4
ZSI
ZSI
5 ZSI module 5
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL 6 6
3 3
module
module
4 4
ZSI
ZSI
5 5 NSE0_01898
6 6
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3VL SENTRON 3WL
Connection diagram for a Zone Selective Interlocking functionality with
3 multiple infeed and several outgoing units with SENTRON 3WL circuit
module
4 breakers
ZSI
NSE0_01897
5
6
SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers used in various

staggered levels
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
15
3 3
module
module
5
6
1
2
3
4
4 4
ZSI
ZSI
5 ZSI module 5
6 6
NSE0_01899
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL

3 3
module
module
4 4
ZSI
5 5ZSI
6 6
Zone Selective Interlocking functionality: Connection using a coupling

switch, use of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/49

© Siemens AG 2009

General data
■ Technical specifications
Size II
Type 3WL12 10 3WL12 20 3WL12 40
Rated current In at 40 °C
Main conductor A ... 1000 2000 4000
Rated operational voltage Ue V DC ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000
(1000 V version, see Catalog LV 1, order code "A05")
Rated insulation voltage Ui V DC 1000 1000 1000
• Main current paths kV 12 12 12
• Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4
• Control circuits kV 2.5 2.5 2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes
• Operation °C –25/+75 –25/+75 –25/+75
• Storage °C –40/+70 –40/+70 –40/+70
Permissible load Up to 40 °C A 1000 2000 4000
At rear horizontal main circuit Up to 55 °C A 1000 2000 3640
connections Up to 60 °C A 1000 2000 3500
(Cu painted black) Up to 70 °C A 1000 1950 3250
Power loss at In for symmetrical loads
Withdrawable circuit breakers W 280 770 1640
Operating times
• Make-time ms 35 35 35
• Opening time ms 34 34 34
• Electrical make-time (through activation solenoid)1) ms 100 100 100
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release) ms 73 73 73
• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release) ms 73 73 73
Endurance3)
15
• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 10 000 10 000 10 000

• Mechanical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles 15 000 15 000 15 000
• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles 6000 6000 4000
• 1000 V version Oper. cycles 1000 1000 1000
• Electrical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles 15 000 15 000 15 000
Switching frequency
• 600 V version 1/h 60 60 60
• 1000 V version 1/h 20 20 20 h m a x .
Mounting position 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° 3 0 ° = 1 m m
and/
or
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 1 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 a N S E 0 _ 0 0 9 2 7 a
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing
frame, IP55 with cover
Auxiliary conductors (Cu) Standard connection = strain-relief clamp
Max. number of • Without end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
auxiliary conductors × • With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
cross-section • With twin end sleeve 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
(solid/stranded)
Optional connection = tension spring
• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Weights 3-pole • Fixed-mounted circuit breakers kg 56 56 64
• Withdrawable circuit breakers kg 60 60 68
• Guide frames kg 31 31 45
4-pole • Fixed-mounted circuit breakers kg 67 67 77
• Withdrawable circuit breakers kg 72 72 82
• Guide frames kg 37 37 54
1) Make-time through activation solenoid for synchronization purposes 2) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see
(short-time excited) 50 ms. Operating Manual).
3)
Further technical specifications on request.
Size II
Type 3WL12
Switching capacity class DC
Up to 220 V DC Icc kA 35
0.5 s kA --
1s kA 351)/302)/253)/204)
2s kA --
3s kA --
1) At Ue = 220 V DC. 3) At Ue = 600 V DC.
2) 4)
At Ue = 300 V DC. At Ue = 1000 V DC.
15/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

■ Characteristic curves
10000
R= 0.4 ... 1.0 n
R= 2 ... 10 s at 6 R
[s]
1000 R = 0.4 n R = 1.0 n I = 1.25 R ... 4 n
R= 10 s [B]
100 B
2 s [A]
B
A
A
10
1
MIN MAX
I= 1.5
I=1.25 I=
4 n
R
R
NSE0_01578
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10
/ n
DIGmat S100 characteristic curve
■ Dimensional drawings
DIGmat S100
257
DIG S100 3,5
250
AUTO
15
ON
_
136
R2 + MENUE
NSE0_01576
R1
115
122
NSE0_01575
AUTO MAIN
MAN PEAK DIAG
271
DIGmat S100 DIGmat S100 drilling pattern
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/51

© Siemens AG 2009

4 7 90 90 90 90
35
NSE0_00633a
4) 5) 40 40
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 3 4 d
275
NSE00635c
437,5
440,5 6
421
11)
e
3)
35
123,5
85 10
270 90 130 130 130 13,5
26
440
c 8 2
d
570
16) 17) 1) 2) according to DIN 43673
12) 90 90 90 90
40
15) 4 7 40 40
14)
80
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 3 7 d
a
3)
602
NSE00638c
541,5
421
516
327,5
3) 11)
451,5
461,5
6
447
g
275
14
5,5
150
80
a
76
90 130 130 130

15
13,5
40
NSE0_02003 45
150 6)
210 106 c 8 2
230 127
Vertical connection
Ø 13,5
130 130 130 90 b

35
90 NSE00641
30
30 30
30
11)
Ø13,5 3) 3)
7) 7)
290
98
Ø9
134,5
35
NSE0_00639f
139 128 NSE00640b

460 90 130 130 130
113,5
590 11)
128,5
NSE00642
2) Arc quenching space, " 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
3) surfaces.
11) Terminal face.
90 130 130 130 14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
surfaces.
surfaces.
17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or
Rated circuit a b c d e f g page 15/36.
breaker
current
A
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
15/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

5 3 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 4 5 c
4) 5) 62,5 4 0 0
NSE0_00643b 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0
NSE00644b
4 0 4 0
3 5
1 3 ,5
275
6
468,5
465,5
403
3 )
1 1 )
3 7 3
2 8 7
123,5
2 6
169,5
11
40
6 9
10) 270 10) 4 5 ,1
350 55 5 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
3 5
480
382,5 according to DIN 43673
5 3 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 4 8 c
367,5 62,5 4 0 0
1 3 ,5
327 16) 17) NSE00647b 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0
NSE0_02084 2) 4 0 4 0
4 0
15)
8 0
12)
7) 8) 6
493
9) 3 )
9
1 1 )
3 7 3
2 8 7
651
34
518,5
a
520
327,5
496
3)
460
15
1 4
c
6 9
275
8 0
169,5
a
150
Ø14
5 5 4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
4 0
10)
76
31
40
27 220 45 6)
42 58
88,5
121,5
140,5
30 30 2) For guide frame 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
38
Ø 13,5 4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.

11) 5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
NSE00649a

8) SENTRON 3WL in test position
139 138
270 95 10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.
460 11) Terminal face.
590
12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.
530 surfaces.
400
90 90 90 90 16) Arc quenching space, 600 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
NSE0_00652b
17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or
3)
287
69
10) 10)
55 45 130 130 130

Rated circuit breaker current a b c page 15/36.
A
For vertical connection and flange connection see following
Up to 2000 10 10 10
page.
4000 30 30 20
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/53

© Siemens AG 2009

Vertical connection
5 3 0
11) 4 0 0
NSE00650a
38 b N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 5 1 a
30
30
3 )
2 8 7
290
100
135
6 9
157 5 5 4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
172
Flange connection
5 3 0
NSE00653
4 0 0
M 1 2 9 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 6 5 4 a
4 0
3 3
2 6
5 9
3 )
2 8 7
2 8 2 ,5
5 9
1 4 2 ,5
6 9
121
4 5 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0
15

system.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
15/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

© Siemens AG 2009

■ Schematics
L1
AC230
+
N
PE -
DC24
AC230
X1.2 X1.1 X5.2 X5.1

DIGmat S100
Auxiliary power
Emergency STOP
+ X4.i1+ X2.1 +
+
Shunt
- X4.i1- (60mV)
DC24 Digital input -
X2.3 -
X4.i2+
X4.i2-
Automatic RESET
Digital output
X4.01 X4.01 X4.02 X4.02 X4.03 X4.03 X4.04 X4.04
+ - + - + - + -
12
14
-K1 11 -Q01 1 3 5
Excitation / Alarm
Automatic / Reset
-X6.14 -X5.12
12 14
SENTRON
3WL
-K2 11 -F1 -F3
NSE0_01577a
-X6.13 -X5.11
15
-Q01 2 4 6
Schematics of the DIGmat S100 and the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic

air circuit breaker
Application examples
Rated operational Required series For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
voltage breaks at rated voltage breakers (operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)
(operational currents up to 4000 A/
conducting path)
Up to 300 V + 10 %
1-pole, 2-pole 1-pole, 2-pole

2 parallel conducting 3 parallel conducting paths, 2 parallel conducting
paths, only with grounded-neutral paths
only with grounded- system
neutral system
Over 300 V + 10 %
Up to 600 V + 10 %
2-pole, 1-pole, 2-pole

only with grounded- 2 parallel conducting paths,
neutral system only with grounded-neutral
system
Over 600 V + 10 %
Up to 1000 V + 10 %
(version for 1000 V
required, order with "-Z"
and order code A05)
1-pole, 2-pole, 1-pole,
only with grounded- only with grounded-neutral only with grounded-
neutral system system neutral system
The connection to the circuit breakers is not dependent on direc- current. If the parallel or series connection is made at a distance
tion and polarity; the circuit diagrams can be adapted of 1 m from the connecting bars, the circuit breaker can be used
accordingly. at full operational current load.
If the parallel or series connections are made directly to the
connecting bars, for thermal reasons the continuous load on the
] Grounded-neutral system
circuit breakers must only be 80 % of the permissible operational @ Load
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009 15/55

© Siemens AG 2009

15
15/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

Catálogo Do Disjuntor Aberto 3WL (Texto em Inglês)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catálogo Do Disjuntor Aberto 3WL (Texto em Inglês)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

15

SENTRON Switching and

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Size I Size II Size III

D mm 291 291 291 291

Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76B

15/2 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

1) Size II with In max 2500 A.

Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/3

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

15/4 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.

Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15/5

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

■ Benefits • Fast and reliable parameterization

The use of modern communication-capable circuit breakers

15/6 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

■ Selection and ordering data

Without electronic release AA Without

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

■ Selection and ordering data

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

ETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FG

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

■ Selection and ordering data

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

■ Selection and ordering data

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

ETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FG